Apple Logic Pro 7.2.1 Dedicated Control Surface Support User Manual 7: (Manual) Logic7 Cntrl Info

Logic7_DedicatedCntrlSurfaceInfo

2006-05-04

User Manual: Apple Logic Logic 7: Dedicated Control Surface Support (Manual)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 255

DownloadApple Logic Pro 7.2.1 Dedicated Control Surface Support User Manual 7: (Manual) Logic7 Cntrl Info
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Logic Pro 7.2.1
Dedicated Control
Surface Support

 Apple Computer, Inc.
© 2004–2006 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be
copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent
of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by
the accompanying software licence agreement.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the
“keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial
purposes without the prior written consent of Apple
may constitute trademark infringement and unfair
competition in violation of federal and state laws.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information in this manual is accurate. Apple Computer,
Inc. is not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
Apple Computer, Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
408-996-1010
www.apple.com
Apple, the Apple logo, Aqua, Final Cut, Final Cut Pro,
FireWire, iBook, iMac, iPod, iTunes, Logic, Mac,
Macintosh, Mac OS, PowerBook, Power Mac, Power
Macintosh, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Finder and GarageBand are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
AppleCare is a service mark of Apple Computer, Inc.
Other company and product names mentioned herein
are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention
of third-party products is for informational purposes
only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a
recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with
regard to the performance or use of these products.

1

Preface

7
7
8

Contents

Introduction
What Are Control Surfaces?
How Control Surface Integration Works

Chapter 1

13
13
13
14
15
16
17
19
25
29
34
45
46

Control Surface Setup
Control Surface Plug-ins
About Software and Firmware
Getting Started
Connecting the Unit(s)
Installing and Setting Up Control Surfaces
Control Surface Groups
Setup Window Parameters
Control Surface Preferences
Customizing Control Surfaces
The Controller Assignments Editor
About Modal Dialogs
Tips

Chapter 2

47
47
48
50
54
69
71
71
73
74
75
79
87
88
89

Logic Control
Set Up
The Displays
The Channel Strip(s)
The Assignment Zone
Fader Bank Zone
Master Fader
Display Zone
The Function Key Zone
The Global View Zone
Function Button Zone
The Transport Zone
The Cursor/Zoom Key Zone
The Jog/Scrub Wheel Zone
Assignment Overview

3

4

Chapter 3

101
101
102
102
102
105
105
106
106
107
108

M-Audio iControl
Setting Up the iControl
Compatibility
Channel Views
The Assignment Buttons
Arrow Up and Arrow Down Buttons
The Channel Strip(s)
The Jog Wheel
The Transport Zone
Master Fader
Assignment Overview

Chapter 4

111
111
112
113
113
113
114
115
120
120
120
120

EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC
Setting Up the MC or System 5-MC With Logic
Setting Up Soft Key Assignments
Main-Tracks Touchscreen
Main-Layouts
Faders
Choosing Automation Modes
Knobsets
Monitors and Control Room
Clear Keys
Track Control Bar
System 5-MC Specific Features

Chapter 5

123
123
123

CM Labs Motormix
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 6

131
131
131
132

Frontier Design TranzPort
Set Up
LCD
Assignment Overview

Chapter 7

135
135
135

JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 8

141
141
141
142

JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100
Requirements
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Contents

Chapter 9

143
143
143

Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 10

147
147
147

Mackie Baby HUI
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 11

151
151
151
157
160
160
160
161

Mackie C4
Set Up
V-Pots, V-Selects
Buttons at Bottom
Marker Overlay
Track Overlay
Channel Strip Overlay
Function Overlay

Chapter 12

163
163
163

Mackie HUI
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 13

173
173
173
178

Radikal Technologies SAC-2K
Set Up
Assignment Overview
Troubleshooting

Chapter 14

179
179
179

Roland SI-24
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 15

185
185
185
185

Tascam FW-1884
Introduction
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 16

193
193
194

Tascam US-2400
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 17

199
199
199

Tascam US-428 and US-224
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 18

203
203

Yamaha 01V96
Set Up

Contents

5

6

204
206
207
207
207
208

Assignment Overview
Selected Channel Section
Data Entry Section
Channel Strips
Stereo Channel Strip
User Defined Keys Section

Chapter 19

211
211
212

Yamaha 02R96
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 20

217
217
218

Yamaha DM1000
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Chapter 21

225
225
226

Yamaha DM2000
Set Up
Assignment Overview

Appendix A

235
235
237

Logic Control—Specifications
Logic Control (Base Unit)
Logic Control XT (Extension Unit)

Appendix B

239
239
240
242

Logic Control—MIDI Implementation
SysEx Message Header
Global Control Messages
Common Control Messages

Appendix C

251

Logic Control—Control Surface Layout and IDs

Appendix D

255

Logic Control—MIDI Implementation Chart

Contents

Introduction

This manual covers the control surface support of Logic Pro.
Please read it thoroughly to make the most of your new
controller(s).
All of the functions in Logic Pro that are normally associated with the use of an analog
style mixer can be performed using just a mouse and a computer keyboard. The
addition of many commercially available control surfaces can greatly enhance your
creative experience by providing you with hands-on control of most realtime
parameters in Logic. Move a fader and the on-screen fader in Logic will move with it.
Similarly, when you make a fader move on-screen, the control surface fader moves (this
only applies to control surfaces equipped with motorized faders). Adjust EQ parameters
by turning one of your control surface’s knobs and Logic will update instantly.

What Are Control Surfaces?
Control surfaces are hardware units that enable the operation of Logic Pro using faders,
rotary knobs, switches, and displays.
There are a number of simple control surfaces that feature conventional faders and no
displays. More progressive units are equipped with motorized faders, rotary encoders,
LED rings, and programmable displays. The more feedback a control surface provides,
the easier it is to use, as you don’t need to watch the computer screen in order to
determine what mode the unit is currently in.
Control surfaces—dependent on the options (buttons, knobs, switches, displays, and so
on) available—have the potential to:
 control all Logic transport functions
 adjust instrument, input, bus, aux, master, and audio channel volume and pan levels
 control Channel EQ and Linear Phase EQ parameters
 select and control all effect and Instrument parameters
 select, solo, mute, and arm tracks
 set and adjust send parameters

7

Â
Â
Â
Â

remotely switch between Screensets
scrub MIDI and audio
zoom in on individual tracks
create, delete, and move between markers, and much more

For live use, control surfaces are ideal. The performing musician only needs to take a
laptop, equipped with suitable audio and/or MIDI interfaces, a keyboard, and a control
surface to a live event. Some units available nowadays incorporate a keyboard, audio
interface, control surface, and MIDI interface into a single package.
Given that Logic Pro’s track automation facilities can be active, even when not in record
mode, you can capture your “live” real time changes for later recall. This ensures that
you’ll never again lose that “once-in-a-lifetime” performance—on stage or in the studio.

How Control Surface Integration Works
Logic Pro features dedicated support for a number of control surface models. This is
achieved through several plug-ins that are directly integrated into Logic. Some plug-ins
support multiple, similarly-featured control surface models.
Note: Although many other control surfaces are supported, the Logic/Mackie Control,
C4, and XT control surface units are recommended for use with Logic.
Logic also allows you to reprogram existing assignments for supported control surfaces
and to program new assignments for unsupported control surfaces. This facility allows
you to extend the use of faders, knobs, and switches, either directly or through the use
of modifier commands.
You can use any combination of control surfaces with Logic Pro. You will get most out
of them, however, when used in a Control Surface Group (provided all devices are
supported by the same plug-in).
Universal information, that applies to all control surfaces, is covered in the following
chapter. Please read this before taking a look at the dedicated section on your control
surface(s).
A detailed overview of group, installation, and other control surface setup parameters
is found in Chapter 1, “Control Surface Setup,” on page 13. Please read this, as it
contains a lot of useful information that will help you to customize and/or make the
most of your control surface(s).
Important: Specific information on device setup is found at the beginning of the
relevant chapter for your control surface (see the table below).

8

Chapter

Introduction

It is assumed that you are familiar with the basic use and terminology of Logic Pro. As
such, the functionality and uses of individual Logic parameters are not covered in this
documentation. Please consult your Logic Pro 7 Reference manual or the Online Help, if
you require further information.
You are strongly encouraged to press buttons, move sliders and turn the knobs of your
control surface while reading through the following chapters. This will help you to get
a “feel” for how your control surface works, and how the various parts of the control
surface interact with one another, and Logic.
A listing of control surfaces that are directly supported by Logic (via a control surface
plug-in included in the Logic package), how they differ from similar devices, and cross
references to the relevant sections are shown below.
Note: It is possible that your device may be directly supported in Logic via a suitable
control surface plug-in, supplied by the manufacturer. Please check the website of your
control surface manufacturer. Follow any written instructions supplied with the plug-in,
if available.
Supported Devices

Manufacturer

Notes

01V96

Yamaha

The Yamaha 01V96 emulates two HUI units, using
two virtual MIDI in and out connections over its
USB cable.
See “Yamaha 01V96” on page 203.

01X

Yamaha

The Yamaha 01X emulates a Logic Control. It does
not feature all controls available to the Logic (and
Mackie) units, however. Please refer to the 01X
documentation for details.
Logic recognizes the 01X as such and displays a
custom icon, but communication is as with a
Logic Control.
See “Logic Control” on page 47.

02R96

Yamaha

The Yamaha 02R96 emulates three HUI units,
using three virtual MIDI in and out connections
over its USB cable.
See “Yamaha 02R96” on page 211.

Baby HUI

Mackie

The Baby HUI is a stripped-down version of the
HUI. See “Mackie Baby HUI” on page 147.

C4

Mackie

The Logic Control plug-in has been extended to
support the Mackie C4.
See “Mackie C4” on page 151.

CM408T

Euphonix

See “EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System
5-MC” on page 111.

CS-32 MiniDesk

JLCooper

See “JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk” on page 135.

Chapter

Introduction

9

10

Supported Devices

Manufacturer

Notes

DM1000

Yamaha

The Yamaha DM1000 emulates two HUI units,
using two virtual MIDI in and out connections
over its USB cable.
See “Yamaha DM1000” on page 217.

DM2000

Yamaha

The Yamaha DM2000 emulates three HUI units,
using three virtual MIDI in and out connections
over its USB cable.
See “Yamaha DM2000” on page 225.

FaderMaster 4/100

JLCooper

See “JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100” on page 141.

FE-8

Tascam

Extension unit for FW-1884. See “Tascam FW1884” on page 185.

FW-1082

Tascam

A stripped-down version of the FW-1884, with
dedicated support in the FW-1884 plug-in.
See “Tascam FW-1884” on page 185.

FW-1884

Tascam

See “Tascam FW-1884” on page 185.

HUI

Mackie

Important: The HUI plug-in has been tested with
the original Mackie HUI. There are a number of
control surfaces not mentioned here which can
emulate the HUI. We have not tested all devices
capable of HUI emulation, and don’t provide any
support for them, nor do we guarantee that they
will work with Logic in HUI emulation mode.
See “Mackie HUI” on page 163.

iControl

M-Audio

See “M-Audio iControl” on page 101.

KONTROL 49

Korg

A larger version of the microKONTROL, with
dedicated support in the microKONTROL plug-in.
See “Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49” on
page 143.

Logic Control XT

Mackie/Emagic

This is the extension unit for the Logic Control. It
only offers the channel strip section, making it
less useful without a Logic Control. See “Logic
Control” on page 47.
Also see the Appendix for more details.

Logic/Mackie Control

Mackie/Emagic

See “Logic Control” on page 47.
Also see the Appendix for more details.

Mackie Control

Mackie

The original Mackie Control hardware is similar to
the Logic Control. The front panel legend is
different, however. You should request a Logic
Control Lexan Overlay from Mackie. As Logic also
recognizes the Mackie Control protocol, you may
use any firmware version. If you have firmware
version 1.02 or higher, you can freely use either
the Logic Control or Mackie Control mode.
See “Logic Control” on page 47.

Chapter

Introduction

Supported Devices

Manufacturer

Notes

Mackie Control Extender

Mackie

Mackie Control version of the Logic Control XT. As
Logic also recognizes the Mackie Control
protocol, you may use any firmware version. If
you have firmware version 1.02 or higher, you can
freely use either the Logic Control or Mackie
Control mode.
See “Logic Control” on page 47.

Mackie Control Universal

Mackie

A Mackie Control with Logic Control silk
screening (legend) and firmware version 2.0 or
higher (including HUI emulation). As Logic also
recognizes the Mackie Control protocol, you may
use any firmware version. If you have firmware
version 1.02 or higher, you can freely use either
the Logic Control or Mackie Control mode.
See “Logic Control” on page 47.

MC

Euphonix

See “EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System
5-MC” on page 111.

microKONTROL

Korg

See “Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49” on
page 143.

Motormix

CM Labs

See “CM Labs Motormix” on page 123.

Radikal Technologies

SAC-2.2

There is a dedicated plug-in for the SAC-2.2/2k’s
native mode.
The Logic Control plug-in detects an SAC-2.2 (in
Logic Control emulation mode) and ignores it,
avoid two installations of the SAC-2.2.
See “Radikal Technologies SAC-2K” on page 173.

Radikal Technologies

SAC-2k

See “Radikal Technologies SAC-2K” on page 173.

SI-24

Roland

See “Roland SI-24” on page 179.

TranzPort

Frontier Design Group See “Frontier Design TranzPort” on page 131.

US-224

Tascam

A stripped-down version of the US-428, with
dedicated support in the US-428 plug-in.
See “Tascam US-428 and US-224” on page 199.

US-2400

Tascam

Logic has support for the US-2400’s native mode.
In contrast to its Logic Control mode, all controls,
including the joystick, are supported.
See section “Tascam US-2400” on page 193.

US-428

Tascam

See “Tascam US-428 and US-224” on page 199.

Chapter

Introduction

11

1

Control Surface Setup

1

Logic offers dedicated support for a number of control
surfaces, plus the option to program unsupported devices.
The following chapter describes functions applicable to all control surface models.
Specific documentation for various models is available in the following chapters.

Control Surface Plug-ins
Dedicated control surface support is achieved through the use of special plug-in files.
These files are automatically added when Logic is installed.
They are located in the /Contents/MIDI Device Plug-ins sub-folder of the Logic
application bundle (to view the bundle contents, Control or right-click on the Logic
application icon, and choose Show Package Contents from the menu). Logic also
checks for control surface plug-ins in the (optional) “/Library/Application Support/
Logic/MIDI Device Plug-ins” and “~/Library/Application Support/Logic/MIDI Device
Plug-ins” (the “~” denotes your user home directory) folders.
When new control surface plug-ins are released independently from a Logic update,
please place them in the folders described above (or as advised in the documentation
supplied with the plug-in).

About Software and Firmware
Most control surfaces have no “intelligence” of their own. Their functionality is host
software-based, making them reliant on Logic to tell them what to do/how to behave.
What this means is that control surfaces cannot perform any function that Logic itself
isn’t capable of. It also means that if Logic is not booted, most control surface units will
do nothing at all.
This reliance on the host application makes your control surface the ultimate
upgradable hardware. As new functions are added to Logic, or you create new
assignments (see “Control Surface Setup” on page 13), your control surface will be able
to access and control them.

13

Most control surface units do, however, have a form of software called “firmware.” This
firmware is much like the BIOS found in your computer. New behaviors—at a hardware
level—such as improved control of fader servo motors and changes to the display can
be made via firmware updates.
The firmware is usually stored on an EEPROM (Electronically Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory) chip. It can often be updated via a simple MIDI dump procedure, in
the form of a MIDI file.
Should new firmware become available, you can simply download the appropriate
MIDI file and play it to your control surface(s), which will be updated accordingly. The
steps required to perform a firmware update will be outlined in the documentation
that accompanies the MIDI file. Please read this before attempting any update.
Note: Some control surfaces may require a physical chip replacement for firmware
updates. Please contact the manufacturer of your device for details.

Getting Started
To make use of your control surface, you will require:
 An installed, authorized copy of Logic Pro.
 If a USB or FireWire equipped device (such as a Yamaha 01X)—a free USB or FireWire
port. This should preferably be a direct USB/FireWire connection with the computer,
rather than via a USB/FireWire hub. Please refer to the documentation provided by
the manufacturer of your control surface.
 If a MIDI-only device (such as a Logic Control)—a free MIDI in and out port for each
unit, on any suitable MIDI interface. As an example; if using a Unitor 8 or AMT 8,
which feature 8 MIDI in and 8 MIDI out ports, with one Logic Control and one Logic
Control XT, you will need to use two of the Unitor8/AMT8’s MIDI ins and two of its
MIDI outs.
 An installed driver (if required by your control surface) that is supported by the
operating system version being used.
Important: Your MIDI interface must feature driver software that supports SysEx
communication. Please consult the documentation that shipped with your MIDI
interface.
The number of units that can be run simultaneously is dependent on the availability of
free MIDI in and out, FireWire or USB ports on your system. In a standard setup, a single
control surface will be used alone, or accompanied by one or more units. It is also
possible to make use of several units to create Control Surface Groups, as discussed in
“Control Surface Groups” on page 17.

14

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

The use of multiple control surfaces expands on the number of tracks, parameters, and
so on that can be controlled with individual faders, knobs, and switches. As an
example, the Logic/Mackie Control XT units are basically identical to the channel strip
section (fader, V-Pot, and LCD) of the main Logic/Mackie Control unit. The Mackie C4
features a number of V-Pots, but no faders. You may add as many XT, C4, or other
control surface units as you wish to your Logic system, provided enough MIDI in and
out ports are available.

Connecting the Unit(s)
Connect your (MIDI) control surfaces as shown in the diagram below.
Computer

MIDI Interface

Optional Footswitches

As mentioned earlier, each MIDI control surface must have a discrete MIDI in and MIDI
out connection. Do not “daisy-chain” other MIDI devices via MIDI thru to the MIDI in or
out ports used by control surfaces, as this may result in data errors.
FireWire and USB units are connected via a single cable to the computer. It is generally
recommended that this is a direct connection with the Macintosh, rather than via a
FireWire/USB hub. Daisy-chaining or the use of hubs can result in data errors.
Optional Footswitches and Pedals
If your control surface features suitable connectors, you may use optional foot switches
to remotely control start/stop and other functions. This may be useful when using
guitars or other instruments that require two-handed playing.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

15

Power Up
Once everything is connected, press the power switch on your control surface. Once
powered, the displays and/or LEDs will illuminate and the LCD (if applicable) will
generally display a welcome message (often including the firmware version number).
Each fader will slide to the top, and back to the bottom of its travel on most motorized
control surfaces. This self-diagnostic power-on procedure indicates that your units are
functioning correctly.
Your computer and MIDI interface can be powered up before or after initialization of
your control surface units. Logic can be started either before or after the units have
completed initialization.

Installing and Setting Up Control Surfaces
Some control surface units (Logic/Mackie Control, for example) will automatically be
detected when Logic is launched. Units which are not detected automatically can be
added via the Setup window. This is accessed via the Setup option in the Preferences >
Control Surfaces menu.
Installation is very easy (and is covered in the Set Up section of the chapter on your
specific device). Some devices may require different or additional steps, but generally,
all you need to do is select the device(s) that you wish to use in Logic, as follows:
To install control surfaces using the Scan function of Logic:
1 Choose New > Install, and in the ensuing Install window, select the desired device from
the list.
Note: You may select one or more models. To select more than one model, select them
with Command held down. If you select more than one model, Logic performs the
desired operation for each model in turn.
2 Press the Scan button. You can also press Enter or double-click the device name.
Logic will then analyze your MIDI system, and will automatically install the devices it
finds, including the correct connection settings.
Note: The Scan function is preferable to manual installation, as Logic is able to gather
the maximum amount of information about the devices.
If you don’t want to select the models to be scanned manually, you can also click “Scan
all.” This will search for all supported control surface units on all MIDI ports. Please be
aware that this may take a while.
Some control surfaces don’t support automatic scanning. Such devices must be added
manually to your setup. In this scenario, you will need to manually set the MIDI In and
Out port parameters.

16

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

To manually add the selected devices to your system:
1 Select the desired devices from the list in the Install window.
2 Click the Add button.
Note: Alternatively you can Option-double-click the desired device.
If a control surface of the selected type already exists in your setup, you will be asked
whether or not you really want to add the new device. You will need to manually alter
the MIDI In and Out port values in the device parameters to match those of the
connected unit.
Once you have completed the scanning or installation of the devices, click Done. The
Install window will close.
Rebuilding Defaults
The Preferences > Control Surfaces > Rebuild Defaults option re-initializes the support
of all connected control surfaces.

Control Surface Groups
If you have multiple control surface units, you can define how they relate to each other,
and build Control Surface Groups. A Control Surface Group consists of a number of
control surface units (using the same plug-in) which are combined to create a single,
unified (and larger) control surface.
You can build up to 20 Control Surface Groups. Each “group” can consist of any number
of physical units. The only limiting factor is the number of available MIDI In/Out (or
USB/FireWire—defined as MIDI) ports.
When multiple control surface units are combined, you can independently determine
the default behavior for each physical device. This is discussed in the Device
Parameters (p. 19) section.
To build a Control Surface Group out of several units:
m Simply arrange their icons (in the Setup window) in a single horizontal row—by
dragging each icon to the desired onscreen location.
The order of the icons from left to right also defines how the tracks and parameters are
arranged on the units.
To use two control surfaces independently:
m Simply arrange them in separate rows—that is, one above the other.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

17

Here is an example with two Logic Control, three Logic Control XT units and a HUI:
Computer icon connected to three rows, as below:

The top row, consisting of Logic Control XT #1, Logic Control XT #2 and Logic Control
#1 form a single Control Surface Group with 24 channels. XT #1 controls channels 1 to
8, XT #2 controls channels 9 to 16, and Logic Control #1 handles channels 17 to 24.
Logic Control #2 and Logic Control XT #3 form a second Control Surface Group,
displaying, say instruments (on channels 1 to 8) and busses (on channels 9 to 16).
The HUI forms a single unit control surface group.
Each Control Surface Group has individual settings, such as Flip Mode, Fader Bank Offset,
Plug-in Parameter Bank Offset and others. This allows you to access, edit, and automate
different sections of the Logic mixer.
In our example, the three units in the top row could be used for control over audio
tracks and MIDI channels. In the middle row, Logic Control #2 could be used for Audio
Instrument channels 1 to 8, and XT #3 could be used for busses. The HUI might edit
group definitions. The physical placement of units, and the way you use them, is
entirely up to you.
Note: The placement of your control surface units in relation to each other should be
the same onscreen as in the real-world. Simply drag ’n drop the desired icon
horizontally in your Control Surface Group to do so.

18

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Setup Window Parameters
The three Parameter boxes along the left edge of the Setup window allow you to
configure your control surface setup to meet your needs.

Device Parameters
Each control surface unit must be connected to an independent MIDI in and out port
(or corresponding USB/FireWire port, designated as a MIDI port by the device driver).
The automatic setup or Scan procedure should have found, and set, the correct MIDI in/
out port settings for each unit.
In the event that the MIDI in or out port identification is incorrect, you can manually
select the appropriate one for the unit. To do so, click-hold on the MIDI Input and
Output pull-down menus, and select the appropriate port(s) of your MIDI interface/
device.
Some devices allow you to define a device ID (or global/basic channel). This can be set
in this area. Module name, model name and firmware version are also displayed in the
device parameters.
The Color parameter defines the color of the Track Control Bar—a bar displayed in the
Arrange window, indicating the tracks that are currently being accessed by your control
surface. The Track Control Bar of each control surface can be assigned a different color.

Special Parameters
Some control surfaces may allow the definition of “special” parameters. An example of
this is fader touch sensitivity. Such parameters can be found in the Special Parameters
area. A detailed description can be found in the documentation of the particular
control surface plug-in.

Control Surface Group Parameters
The following parameters are shown in the Setup window. They apply to the Control
Surface Group associated with the selected device, and allow you to set each group up
to meet your needs. This facility is of great benefit when multiple Control Surface
Groups have been created.
Many (if not all) Control Surface Group parameters can also be changed directly from
the control surface. The parameter display in the Setup window is for information
purposes only.
Any changes to settings (made here, or on the control surface) are saved in a
preferences file, which is independent of the Logic program preferences: it’s named
“com.apple.logic.pro.cs”, and is located in ~/Library/Preferences/Logic.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

19

Display Parameters
The following section describes the display parameters of a Control Surface Group.
Flip Mode
Many control surfaces offer both a fader and a rotary encoder for each channel strip.
Flip Mode allows you to swap the encoder assignment with that of the fader for each
channel. Alternately, you can assign both controls to the same parameter.
There are four “flip” or “swap” modes.
 Off—disables Flip Mode, making the fader act as a volume control.
 Duplicate—makes both the fader and encoder active for the currently selected
encoder parameter.
 Swap—swaps the fader and encoder, making the fader a pan control and the
encoder a channel volume control, for example.
 Mute—disables the faders. This is useful for situations where recording is taking place
in the same room as the control surface, and you wish to avoid the mechanical noise
of the faders. Any existing automation data will still function as per normal.
Display Mode
If there is insufficient space available for the display of both the parameter name and
value (on the control surface LCD), you can specify what is displayed here:
 Value—displays the parameter value.
 Name—displays the parameter name.
Clock Display
If your control surface features a song position display, the Clock Display parameter
allows you to set the display mode:
 Beats—the song position display shows Bars/Beats/(optional) Sub Division/Ticks.
 SMPTE—as above, but in Hours/Minutes/Seconds/Frames.
Note: The exact elements displayed, and thus their positions, depend on the selected
SMPTE or bar/beat display option defined in the Logic Preferences.
Track View Mode
This parameter determines which tracks or channels are displayed:
 Mixer—displays channels in their order of appearance in the Track Mixer window
(while Global mode is disabled). Channel Strip 1 in the Track Mixer is equivalent to
channel 1 on the control surface, Channel Strip 2 in the Track Mixer is equivalent to
channel 2 and so on. Instruments/channels used by multiple tracks are merged into
one channel. Mixer View is the default mode of most devices, including the Logic/
Mackie Control.

20

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Â Global—displays all Objects of certain type(s)—MIDI or Bus channels, for example—
independent of their usage by tracks. They merely need to be defined as
Environment Objects to be visible. The Object types to be displayed are defined by
another parameter which is not shown in the parameter list. If a control surface
supports switching to Global View, it will also allow you to define which Objects to
display. The Track Mixer window contents automatically follow the state of the Global
View buttons. It also sets Object filters in accordance with the Object classes
activated in Global View.
 Arrange— Arrange View is similar to Mixer View, with one exception: Namely, if
multiple tracks play back via the same Environment Object, all of these tracks will be
displayed on separate channel strips. This is helpful when used in conjunction with
the nudge commands, for example. The Hide button status is taken into account,
with tracks hidden in the Arrange window also being hidden on the control surface.
These modes are mutually exclusive, so if you’re in one View mode, you cannot be in
the other.
It is important to note that the Mixer vs. Global View modes is a property of the Control
Surface Group, not a global setting. So one group can display busses, while the other
shows tracks, for example.
Mixer View Fader Bank
This parameter affects the Track View mode by shifting channels by the defined
amount. Imagine that your control surface has eight channel strips, and you were
looking at audio tracks 1 to 8 in the Arrange window. These would appear as channels
1 to 8 on the control surface. Using the Mixer View Fader Bank parameter, you could
offset this view by a defined number of channels, to see audio tracks 3 to 11, for
example.
Global View Fader Bank
The Global View Fader Bank parameter performs much like the Mixer View Fader Bank,
but only applies if multiple Object types are enabled. When single Object types are
enabled, there are separate fader bank parameters (these aren’t displayed in the
parameter list).
Track/Channel Parameters
The track or channel parameters define the behavior of a control surface’s channel/
track controls.
Track Parameter
Defines the current track assignment behavior for the encoders. Options are:
 Volume—encoders adjust channel volume.
 Pan—encoders adjust channel panorama position.
 Mode—encoders adjust/select channel mode (mono/stereo).

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

21

Input—encoders adjust/select channel input source.
Output—encoders adjust/select channel output (main outs/busses/surround).
Automation—encoders adjust/select channel automation mode.
Group—encoders adjust group membership of the track. Editing the parameter
allows you to set either no group or a single group. Enabling membership of multiple
groups is not possible here.
 Displayed parameter—encoders adjust the automation parameter displayed in the
Arrange window. This is especially useful if you set the control surface to Arrange
View mode, and your Arrange window shows multiple sub-tracks with various
parameters.
Â
Â
Â
Â

Surround Parameter
Defines the default pan/surround assignment behavior for the encoders. Options are:
 Angle— encoders adjust surround angle.
 Diversity—encoders adjust surround diversity (direction).
 LFE—encoders alter LFE level.
 Mode—encoders switch between the various surround formats.
 X—encoders adjust surround x position.
 Y—encoders adjust surround y position.
 Center—encoders adjust the Center Level values of a surround output channel.
Note: The X and Y parameters are a different representation of the Angle and Diversity
parameters, and thus are independent from them. The X and Y parameters support the
use of surround joysticks.
EQ Band
The EQ Band parameter allows you to select the current EQ band, if you wish to edit a
particular Channel EQ or Linear Phase EQ parameter for all tracks in the EQ Multi
Channel View.
EQ Parameter
This parameter determines which parameter of the selected EQ Band is edited by the
encoders in EQ Multi Channel View:
 Frequency—encoders determine the frequency of the selected band.
 Gain—encoders change the gain of the selected EQ band. For the Low Cut (band 1)
and High Cut (band 8) bands of the Channel and Linear Phase EQ, this parameter
controls the slope.
 Q—encoders change the Q factor of the selected band.
 On/Off—encoders bypass the selected EQ band.

22

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

EQ Parameter Page
The EQ Parameter Page parameter defines the EQ parameter displayed in the EQ
Channel Strip View.
To explain: The Channel and Linear Phase EQs feature 8 bands per audio channel, with
each band offering four parameters. All of these parameters can be accessed with your
control surface.
If you use a control surface that does not display all EQ parameters at once, you need
to step through the parameter “pages.” As an example: Imagine you are using an eight
channel control surface. You can directly affect parameters 1 to 8 with knobs/sliders 1
to 8—once you’ve switched to EQ Channel Strip Edit View. You then need to switch by
a “page” to access parameters 9 to 16.
Send/Plug-in Parameters
These parameters define how your control surface controls send and plug-in
parameters.
Send Slot
The Send Slot parameter determines the currently selected Send slot. Normally, a value
of 1 would be used, as this accesses the first (top) Send on each channel. A value of 2
accesses the second Send, and so on, to Send 8. The Send slots are accessed by
pressing the Up/Down buttons on your control surface—if applicable.
Send Parameter
Defines the Send parameter (to be edited with the encoders) when in the Send Multi
Channel view:
 Destination:—encoder is used to determine the bus channel number for the Send
slot.
 Level—encoder is used to adjust the Send level.
 Position—encoders set Pre or Post fader modes.
 Mute—encoders mute/unmute the selected Send slot.
Send Parameter Page
Much like the EQ parameters, up to 32 parameters are available in Send Channel Strip
View for a given channel (Eight Send slots multiplied by the four parameters listed
above). Send Parameter Page determines the current page for these parameters.
Split: no. of upper parameters
Control surfaces that support split mode allow the display of two separate parameter
sections within one plug-in (or even different plug-ins). They are called Split Upper and
Split Lower.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

23

This parameter defines how many encoders belong to Split Upper, leaving the
remaining encoders to Split Lower. A value of 0 means that Split Mode is off—with all
encoders assigned to the Split Upper area.
Instrument Parameter Page
The Instrument Parameter Page option determines the parameter (counted from 1)
which is assigned to the left-most encoder when editing an Audio Instrument. The next
Instrument parameter is assigned to encoder 2, and so on.
This applies to Split Upper when Split Mode is enabled.
Inst Parameter Page (Split Lower)
As above, but for Split Lower.
Insert Slot
Determines the current Insert slot number for both selecting a plug-in (in Plug-in
Channel Strip View) and editing its parameters. A value of 1 accesses the first (top) plugin slot on each channel. A value of 2 accesses the second plug-in slot, and so on.
With Split Mode enabled, this applies to Split Upper.
Insert Slot (Split Lower)
As with Insert Slot, but for Split Lower.
Plug-In Parameter Page
As with Instrument Parameter Page, but for editing plug-ins. Having these parameters
separate allows you to quickly switch between editing an instrument and an effect on
a track, without the need to adjust the parameter page every time.
With Split Mode enabled, this applies to Split Upper.
Plug-In Parameter Page (Split Lower)
As with Plug-In Parameter Page, but for Split Lower.
Track
Specifies the currently displayed track for Channel Strip Views. With Split Mode
enabled, this applies to Split Upper.
Track (Split Lower)
As with Track, but for Split Lower.
Track Lock
When this parameter is set to “on,” selecting a track in Logic does not change the Track
and Track (Split Lower) parameters. In other words, the control surface group continues
to display the same track, independent from the currently selected track.
When Track Lock is disabled, the control surface group automatically switches to the
selected track, whenever a track is selected.

24

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Other Parameters
The following section describes the Track Name Format, Parameter Page Shift Mode,
Relative Change Mode, Mix Group and Group Parameter Page parameters.
Track Name Format
Changes the track name display to show the track name alone, or the track name, and
its track number. As an example, a track named “Audio1” may actually be placed on
track 12 in the Arrange window. When a value of #:Name is toggled, “Audio1” would be
displayed as “12:Au1”.
Parameter Page Shift Mode
Defines whether the parameter is shifted by an entire “page” or by one parameter.
Relative Change Mode
This determines the behavior of controller assignments that features a relative value
change mode (for example rotary encoders).
 Coarse: the parameter can be adjusted in coarse steps.
 Full: In this mode, a turn to the right sets the encoder to its maximum value. A turn to
the left sets the encoder to its minimum value. The encoder also stops at its default
value. As an example: When the Pan knob is somewhere left of center, turning the
encoder to the right will initially set the Pan parameter to its center (default value)
position, with a further right-turn setting the full right (maximum value) position.
 Fine: the value is incremented/decremented in fine steps—by one tick or “unit,” for
example. In this mode, the standard adjustable resolution is ignored, and the highest
possible resolution is used. As an example, using the Sample Delay parameter: every
encoder rotation tick in/decreases the value by 1 ms, regardless of the resolution
value.
Note: Coarse is the default mode.
Mix Group
When in Group Edit mode, this parameter defines the edited group.
Group Parameter Page
As with the Instrument Parameter Page, but for the parameters of the edited group.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

25

Control Surface Preferences
The Control Surface preferences window is accessible via the Logic > Preferences >
Control Surfaces > Preferences menu.
Note: You can also use the global Control Surfaces Preferences key command.

General
The following section outlines the General control surface preferences.
Resolution of Relative Controls
This defines the default resolution of controls that change values in a relative manner.
The default is 128 steps.
As an example: adjusting the Sample Delay (value range 0 to 4000 ms) in/decreases
the value by 40 ms with every encoder rotation “tick,” if resolution is set to 100.
Maximum MIDI Band Width
This slider determines the maximum amount of MIDI bandwidth that can be used by
your control surface. By default, this is set to 50%, which should be suitable for most
situations. You can adjust the value if you find that your MIDI or automation playback is
being affected.
Touching fader selects track
Activation of this parameter will automatically select the track that corresponds to the
selected fader. You require a device that features touch-sensitive faders for this
functionality to work.
Jog resolution depends on horizontal zoom
If your control surface features a jog/shuttle wheel (or similar), the precision of any
scrubbing is affected by the horizontal zoom level of Logic. To retain a consistent
resolution, regardless of Logic window zoom levels, disable this checkbox.
Pickup Mode
If your control surface does not feature motorized faders and knobs, parameter
changes—caused by playing back existing automation—are not reflected on its
surface.
Such control surfaces usually offer a Pickup mode. In Pickup mode, the current value
must be reached (“picked up”) by the control surface before a value change can occur.
This prevents sudden “jumps” of parameter values after parameter changes caused by
playing back automation. A display (usually a pair of LED’s) will indicate the direction/
distance you need to move the controller to match (also known as “NULL”) the settings
shown in Logic. Once you have matched the onscreen values, deactivate Pickup mode,
and start automating.

26

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

When the Pickup mode option is disabled, adjusting a fader modifies the parameter
immediately.
Multiple Controls per Parameter
These parameters determine whether one, or multiple, encoders are used per
parameter when editing plug-ins or audio instruments.
When multiple encoders are used per parameter, the encoders are subdivided into
groups (for example 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8). The first encoder of each sub-division controls
the parameter shown in the display. The remaining encoder(s) are inactive.
Using more than one encoder per parameter shows fewer parameters at any given
time, but you gain space on the LCD to cater for longer parameter names and values.
The more control surfaces you have within a Control Surface Group, the more you
benefit from this feature.
The Multiple controls per parameter pull-down menu defines the maximum number of
encoders which will be used for a single parameter.
 1: Parameters are always displayed using one encoder per parameter, with the least
space available for parameter name and value in the LCD.
 2: On each unit, encoders 1 and 2 are used for the first parameter, encoders 3 and 4
for the second, and so on.
 4: On each unit, encoders 1 to 4 are used for the first parameter, encoders 5 to 8 for
the second, and so on.
Only when all Parameters fit in one Page
When this option is checked, the defined number of encoders are only used when
there are sufficient encoders available to show all parameters without changing pages.
As an example:
 You have a Logic Control and two Logic Control XTs, providing you with 24 encoders.
 A plug-in with 13 parameters will be shown with one encoder per parameter. Eleven
encoders will remain unused.
 A plug-in with 11 parameters will be shown with two encoders per parameter. Two
encoders will remain unused (as will the inactive encoders of the abovementioned
sub-divisions).
When the option is unchecked, multiple encoders are used for each parameter, which
may require scrolling. This would not be the case if only one encoder was used for each
parameter.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

27

Show Value Units For:
Allows you to adjust whether parameter values will be appended by the measurement
“unit,” where applicable—“Hz” or “%”, for example. You can set this option separately for
Instrument / Plug-in parameters and Volume and other parameters. If you can do without
the value units, the display is less cluttered.
Controller Assignments
The Controller Assignments button launches the Controller Assignments Editor.
Setup
The Setup button launches the Control Surfaces Setup window.

Help Tags
Control Surfaces that offer freely programmable displays with more than six characters
per line/segment of the display, can use Control Surfaces Help Tags. These Help Tags
are similar to Logic Help Tags, showing additional information during use. You can
determine the type of information displayed in the Help Tags pane of the Control
Surfaces preferences.
While Editing Show Long Names For:
 Parameter Name—While editing a parameter, the upper LCD line displays the full
parameter name, rather than an abbreviated form of it.
 Parameter Value—While editing a parameter, the lower LCD line displays the full
parameter value. If the Show value unit for parameter box (see below) is checked, it
will be appended by the measurement unit, where applicable—“dB”, “Hz” or “%”.
Note: The following options only have an effect if at least one of the two parameters
above is active.
Display duration (s)
Use the mouse to adjust the time that parameter names and values remain on the LCD
display, following selection/adjustments.
Allow multiple info
This determines the behavior when you edit multiple parameters simultaneously. When
enabled: the long name info remains in the display, until the most recently edited
parameter’s display times out. This may cause overlapping text. When disabled: the
long name display is only shown for the most recently edited parameter. This can cause
flicker.
Show info when selecting tracks
When this option is checked, and you select a track, you will see “Selected” in the upper
row, and the selected track’s name in the lower row of the LCD. You can disable this
feature, if you find it disconcerting.

28

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Show info when editing volume
When this option is checked, and you edit a track’s volume, you will see “Volume” in the
upper row and the new volume value in the lower row. You can disable this feature, if
you find it disconcerting.
Show Value Units For:
Allows you to adjust whether parameter values will be appended by the measurement
“unit,” where applicable—“Hz” or “%”, for example. You can set this option separately for
Instrument / Plug-in parameters and Volume and other parameters. If you can do without
the value units, the display is less cluttered.
Note: This parameter only applies while editing.

Customizing Control Surfaces
Logic allows you to reprogram existing assignments for supported control surfaces and
to program new assignments for unsupported control surfaces. This facility allows you
to extend the use of faders, knobs, and switches, either directly or through the use of
modifier commands. As an example, The buttons F1 to F8 of the Logic Control are
assigned to screensets 1 to 8 by default. When reassigned directly, or combined with
the Shift, Option, Control, and Command modifiers (used in any combination), you can
freely assign any command to these function keys (F1 to F8).
To assign a MIDI control to a parameter:
1 Click the destination parameter that you want to “teach” Logic.
2 Activate Learn by pressing Command-L (default), or via the Logic > Preferences > Control
Surfaces > Learn Assignment for “xxx” menu option (the parameter name is appended to
the menu item text).
3 The (small) assignment editor window is launched, with the Learn Mode button
enabled.
 If you continue to hold down the computer’s Command key (or whatever modifier
key is assigned to the key command), a Help Tag will indicate what needs to be done
next (move control, for example).
 If MIDI messages are received while the Command key is held down, releasing the
key closes the Help Tag window, and the learn procedure is completed.
Note: If no MIDI messages are received, releasing the Command (modifier) key(s) leaves
the Learn Mode button enabled, allowing you to immediately retry the generation of
the intended control message. You will need to disable the Learn Mode button
manually, once the procedure is completed.
To abort the learn procedure:
m Either press Command-L a second time, or click the Learn Mode button.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

29

This will, however, result in a new, unfinished assignment. You can re-enable the Learn
Mode button to assign a message.
To delete a MIDI control assignment:
1 Click the destination parameter that you would like to delete.
2 Select the Logic > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Delete Assignment for “xxx” menu
option (the parameter name is appended to the menu item text), press the backspace
key—or you may use the Edit > Clear menu option.
To assign a control surface button to a key command:
1 Select the desired key command in the Key Commands window.
2 Click the Learn New Assignment button.
3 Press a control surface button that sends a MIDI message.
Note: After about 5 ms, the Learn New Assignment button is automatically deactivated.
This is designed to prevent recording of a button release message.
It is also possible to assign a key command to a button/key release message:
1 Simply press and hold the desired button/key before you enable the Learn New
Assignment button.
2 When you release the button/key, the selected key command is assigned to the button
release message.
To delete a key command assignment:
1 Select the desired key command in the Key Commands window.
2 Press the Backspace key.

Changing an Existing Assignment
The Learn procedure opens the Assignment Editor in Easy View, which offers an
overview of the most important parameters, allowing you to tweak the newly-created
assignment in the following ways:
 Control Name (Learned for unsupported devices; name of control for supported
devices).
 Class (Track, for example).
 Object (Fader Bank, for example).
 Parameter (Volume or Plug-in parameter 5—relative to the parameter bank, for
example).
 Value Change message (Display only).
 Mode (Direct, Toggle, Scaled, Relative, Rotate, X-OR).
 For On/Off parameters, the mode is set to Toggle by default. Otherwise it is set to
Scaled if an absolute control (fader, pot) has been recognized, or to Relative if an
encoder has been recognized.

30

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Â Multiply, with shortcuts for +1 and –1 (–1 for decrementing).
Note: For details on the abovementioned Assignment parameters read “Assignment
Parameters” on page 35. For a full view of all parameters, enable the Expert View
option.

Shortcuts for Defining Multiple Assignments
If you want to define multiple assignments in the Controller Assignment Editor, you can
use the following shortcuts:
Scenario 1: assign faders 1 to 16 to volume of tracks 1 to 16
1 Learn volume track 1 for fader 1.
2 Learn volume track 16 for fader 16.
3 As the track “distance” (15) is the same as the controller number distance for the two
most recently learned assignments, a “Do you want to fill up in between?” message
appears. Select OK to automatically fill the faders with corresponding Volume
assignments for each track.
Note: This feature also works for any other track parameter (Pan, Solo, Mute, and so on).
Scenario 2: assign knobs 1 to 16 to plug-in parameters 1 to 16
1 Learn parameter 1 for knob 1.
2 Learn parameter 16 for knob 16.
Note: The parameter enumeration is shown in the Plug-in window’s Control View.
3 As the gap between parameter numbers (15) is the same as the gap between controller
numbers for the two most recently learned assignments, a “Do you want to fill up in
between?” message appears. Select OK to automatically fill the knobs with
corresponding Parameter assignments for each.
Note: This feature also works for instrument parameters. Currently, this only works for
knobs that send a single channel message, where the first data byte is the controller
number and the second data byte is the value. Alternatively, the controller number can
be encoded in the MIDI channel, with a fixed first data byte.

Zones, Modes, and Assignments
You can define “groups” of controls on a control surface that can be switched between
different operating modes. As an example, the Logic Control rotary encoders can be
used to control Pan, Send Level or plug-in parameters.
Such “groups” are called Zones. The different operations that can be performed within a
Zone are called Modes.
A Zone contains one or more Modes, one of which is the active Mode. A Zone may also
contain modeless assignments—assignments which are always active.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

31

The reason for this structure is that you can place modeless assignments nearer to the
modal assignments they are associated with. As an example, where pressing and
releasing the Option button switches between two modes for the Function keys of an
assignment.
A Mode contains any number of assignments. Only the active Mode’s assignments are
processed for incoming MIDI and feedback. Assignments of inactive Modes are ignored.
A Zone’s active Mode can be switched by special Assignments (see below).
There can be multiple Zones. As examples, one for the encoders and a second one that
switches the F1 to F8 keys to different functions.
Zones and Modes can be defined across multiple control surfaces, to create Control
Surface Groups.
You can visualize the Control Surface System as a hierarchical list. As an example:
Zone 1
 Modeless Assignment
 Modeless Assignment
 Mode 1
 Modal Assignment
 Modal Assignment
 Mode 2 (active)
 Modal Assignment
 Modal Assignment
 Modal Assignment
 Modal Assignment
 Mode 3
 Modal Assignment
Zone 2
 Mode 4 (active)
 Modal Assignment
 Mode 5
 Modal Assignment
 Modal Assignment

32

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Reassigning a Control
If you want to reassign a control, the procedure depends on the current state of the
control.
Case 1: Control is currently active (an assignment for this control is part of an active
Mode).
If you attempt to learn an assignment for an “active” controller, the following message
is displayed: “This control is currently assigned to xxx. Do you want to reassign the
control?”
 Cancel—Deletes the learned assignment.
 Parallel assignment—Retains the new assignment. Typical usage: one knob controls
multiple parameters as a macro.
 Reassign—Deletes all existing active assignments for this parameter. Typical usage:
reassigning an F1 to F8 key to a new key command.
 Create new mode—Creates a new mode and places the assignment into the new
mode. In this scenario, you will need to learn an assignment to switch between the
old and new modes.
Should you choose the latter option, the Controller Assignment Editor opens in Expert
view, with the new mode selected, and a warning icon. If you move the mouse cursor
over the icon, a Help Tag indicates that: “There is no mode change assignment yet to
switch to this mode. Please click “Learn Mode Change” to create one.”
Case 2: Control is currently inactive (an assignment for this control is part of an
inactive mode).
The learned assignment is moved to the active mode of the zone where the inactive
assignment was found.
Typical usage of this facility: Supported control surfaces have empty user pages
available, allowing for new encoder assignments. You would select user mode, and
then learn an assignment for the encoder.
You can define multiple pages for a control surface.
Cases 1 and 2 can occur simultaneously.
Reassigning a Parameter
Logic allows you to reassign a parameter that is already assigned to a MIDI control. The
procedure depends on the current state of the assignment.
Case 1: Assignment to a parameter that is currently active (as it is part of an active
mode)
If you attempt to change an existing “active” parameter assignment, the following
message is displayed: “This destination parameter is currently assigned for control xxx.
Do you want to reassign the parameter?”

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

33

Â Cancel—Deletes the learned assignment.
 Parallel assignment—Retains the new assignment. Typical usage: One knob controls
multiple parameters as a macro.
 Reassign—Deletes all existing active assignments for this parameter. Typical usage:
Reassigning an F1 to F8 key to a new key command.
Case 2: Assignment to a parameter is currently inactive
If an assignment to a parameter is currently inactive (as it is part of an inactive mode),
no special action is required.

The Controller Assignments Editor
The Controller Assignments Editor is opened via the Logic > Preferences > Control
Surfaces > Controller Assignments menu item.
It allows you to edit all assignments of the Controller Assignments table. This table is a
part of the Control Surfaces Preferences and is stored (along with all other control
surface support settings) in the ~/Library/Preferences/com.apple.Logic.pro.cs file.
The Controller Assignments Editor offers two view modes: Easy and Expert. The view
modes can be switched via the Expert View option at the top of the window.
Easy mode is designed to make learning Track parameter assignments as fast and
efficient as possible. Therefore, this window only shows Track parameters—when first
opened. After switching to Expert view and manually choosing another parameter
class, the corresponding parameters are also shown in Easy view. It is generally
recommended that Easy view is only used for Track parameter assignments.
Easy mode offers an overview of the following parameters:
 Parameter: Displays clear text of the addressed parameter.
 Track (default): This field can be used to specify the track parameter you would like
to assign. You can choose between the Selected option (which is the default, if
creating assignments on the selected track) or a fixed track number (if you want to
set up your controls as a mixer surface).
 Input message: Displays the incoming message data.
Note: For details on the abovementioned Assignment parameters read “Assignment
Parameters” on page 35. For a full view of all parameters, enable the Expert View option.
Only one set of assignment parameters are visible at a time. You can choose the
desired assignment with the left/right arrows at the bottom of the window. If you
activate the Follow option at the top of the Controller Assignments window, the
window always selects the assignment that matches the most recently received
incoming MIDI message.

34

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

In Expert mode, there are four re-sizable columns:
 Zone—Selects the Zone that contains the Modes and assignments being edited. The
first entry “(No Zone)” is for zoneless assignments. Double-click a Zone name to edit
it.
 Mode—Selects the Mode that contains the assignments being edited. The first entry
“(No Mode)” is for mode-less assignments. Double-click a Mode name to edit it.
Selecting a Mode in the list also makes it the Zone’s active Mode. The active Mode is
marked with an arrow.
 Control/Parameter—Selects the assignment displayed in the editor to the right.
Multiple selection is possible for operations in the Edit menu. In this scenario,
however, only the first selected assignment is displayed. The left column displays the
control name, the right column the controlled parameter (in an abbreviated form).
 Assignment Parameters—Displays all parameters of an assignment. See the next
section.
If you activate the Follow option at the top of the Controller Assignment Editor, the
window always selects the assignment that matches the most recently received
incoming MIDI message.

Assignment Parameters
The following section covers all parameters that can be edited in the Controller
Assignment Editor.
Control Name
Name of the control (Fader 1, for example). This is Learned by default for assignments
created with the Learn function (see above) from supported control surfaces. This
name is for information purposes only and has no influence on functionality.
Label
Text displayed on control surfaces that feature a display (and are supported by a plugin). A @ character starts an escape sequence which acts as a placeholder for
dynamically generated text. The escape sequence consists of three characters: @ and
two additional characters:

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

35

First Character:
Character

Meaning

t

Track

r

Surround

s

Send slot

S

All Sends

e

EQ band

E

all EQs

p

Plug-in Insert slot

i

Instrument

Second Character:
Character

Meaning

#

Number of above (track number, Send slot, EQ band, Plug-in slot)

n

Name of above

p

Name of parameter addressed by the assignment

P

Name of first parameter

o

Parameter offset, counted from 1

O

Maximum parameter offset, counted from 1

b

Parameter bank (= parameter offset/bank size), counted from 1

B

total number of banks (= parameter offset/bank size), counted from 1

Example: “Send@s#” shows “Send1”, “Send2”, and so on.
Flip Group
When set (to any value other than “none”), this number defines a counterpart for Flip
Mode. By setting a fader and an encoder to the same Flip Group, for example, they are
coupled. To set “none,” enter 0.
Exclusive
Only for supported control surfaces: when the Exclusive checkbox is enabled, the
assignment deactivates all other assignments that have Exclusive disabled (for the same
control). This limits the overwriting of a modeless assignment to particular modes.
Example: Faders normally control volume. If you want to create a mode where faders
control send level, enable Exclusive.
Class
This pop-up menu can be used to define the assignment class or, put another way,
what type of destination parameter is controlled. The following section explains all
available Class options.

36

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Mode Change
The Mode Change option allows you to use an assignment to activate a mode in a
Zone. An additional Mode pop-up menu appears below the Class menu, offering
different Modes you can switch to. As an example: The Assignment buttons on a Logic
Control choose several Modes for the encoders.
Note: The Mode that is recalled also depends on the option set in the Value section’s
Mode menu (See “Mode” on page 43.). The following table explains how the different
Value Modes take effect.
Value Mode option

Explanation

Direct

The stated Mode is activated in the Zone it belongs to. It is not necessary for
the Mode Change assignment to be located in the same Zone.
Example: While Shift is held down, button X switches the encoders to EQ view.
The Shift and X buttons are in Zone A, but the encoders are in Zone B.
All other value modes: Only the Modes of the Zone the Mode Change
assignment is located in can be recalled. The destination parameter minimum
is this Zone’s first Mode, and the maximum is the Zone’s last Mode.

Toggle

A button might toggle between the Zone’s first Mode and the stated Mode

Relative

Useful for stepping up and down through Modes of a Zone using two buttons,
or for choosing a mode using an encoder.

Rotate

Useful for stepping through all modes using a single button. A jog wheel, for
example: Off → Scrub → Shuttle → Off

Global
The Global option allows you to use an assignment to control global parameters. An
additional Global pop-up menu appears below the Class menu, offering the parameters
listed in the following table.
Global Options

Explanation

SPL

Song Position Line; Text feedback in format of foreground window (beats or
time code)

SPL (Beats)

Song Position Line; Text feedback in beats format

SPL (Time Code)

Song Position Line; Text feedback in time code format

SPL (Beats,
Scrubbing)

Song Position Line; Text feedback in beats format. Value change does not set
SPL directly, but initiates scrubbing. The value defines the scrubbing speed

Move Locators

Moves left and right locators

Left Locator

Sets left locator

Right Locator

Sets right locator

Move Drop

Moves Drop In and Drop Out locators

Drop In Locator

Sets Drop In locator

Drop Out Locators

Sets Drop Out locator

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

37

Global Options

Explanation

Marker Position

Edits position of current marker

Marker Length

Edits length of current marker

Note: All options listed in the table above work only in relative mode. See the “Clock
Part” sub-parameter.
Global Options

Explanation

Nudge selected
Regions/Events

Nudges the selected Regions or events by the chosen Nudge Value (see below)

Any Solo

Feedback only, used for “Rude Solo Light”. On if any Solo (track or Region)
switch is enabled

Nudge Value

Nudge Value used for Nudge selected Regions/Events. Possible values are: Tick,
Format, Beat, Bar, Frame, 1/2 Frame

Scrub Status

Sets the scrubbing status for parameter SPL (beats, scrubbing). Possible values
are: set clock, audio scrubbing, Shuttle

Automation of all
tracks

Sets the automation mode of all tracks. Possible values are: Off, Read, Touch,
Latch, Write, MIDI

Alert Text, Alert
Button, Alert Icon

Used by plug-ins to define special alert mode.

Dummy

No function; Used to temporarily disable a modeless assignment, using
“Exclusive”

Cycle

Sets Cycle mode

Drop

Sets Drop mode

Go to Marker

Sets the SPL to marker number

Group Clutch

Sets the Automation Group Clutch; Automation Groups are disabled when the
Clutch is enabled. For buttons, set the Group Clutch to 1 when the button is
pressed, and set it to 0 when the button is released

Active Sense

Used by the HUI to process incoming “Active Sensing” messages

Shuttle Speed

Sets Shuttle Speed directly; Use for shuttle rings that send an absolute value

Waveform Zoom

Sets Waveform zoom in active Arrange window, if open and in foreground

Quantize value

Sets the Quantize value in the current window (if this parameter is available)

Format

Sets the Format value in the current window (if this parameter is available)

Horizontal Zoom

Sets horizontal zoom in the current window (if this parameter is available)

Vertical Zoom

Sets vertical zoom in the current window (if this parameter is available)

Dependent of the option chosen in the Global menu, you have access to the following
two additional parameters:
 Clock Part—Chooses the resolution of the parameter change: Bar, Beat, Format,
Ticks, Cycle Length
 Marker No—Determines the destination marker number

38

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Track
The Track option allows you to use an assignment to set a track parameter. An
additional Track pop-up menu appears below the Class menu, offering the parameters
listed in the following table.
Track Options

Explanation

Fader Bank

This addresses a track in the Control Surface Group’s current View mode (Mixer,
Global, Arrange), depending on the Control Surface Group’s current Fader Bank
value for this Mode (see below).
Example: The View mode is Mixer, the Mixer view Fader Bank is five, and the
number next to this parameter is two. Thus, the eighth track in the Mixer view
is addressed (Fader Bank and No. are 0-based, so add 1)

Selected

This normally corresponds to the selected Arrange track. Exception: if the
Control Surface Group’s Track Lock parameter is enabled, then “Selected”
corresponds to the track that was selected when Track Lock was enabled

Index

Same as Fader Bank option, but doesn’t depend on the current Fader Bank
value

Bus

An Audio Bus. No. defines which Bus is addressed (again: 0-based; to address
Bus 2, use a value of 1)

Output

Same as Bus option, but for Output Objects

Master

The Master Output Object; If it does not exist in the song, the first Output
Object is addressed

If you choose the Fader Bank, Index, Bus, Output, or Master option in the Track pop-up
menu, the following two parameters are also available:
 No.—A 0-based offset which is added to the track number. Typical usage: Fader 1
uses offset 0, Fader 2 uses offset 1 and so on.
 Parameter—Clear text of the addressed parameter. Can only be set by the Learn
Assignment for xxx menu item. Note that for plug-in and instrument parameters,
Parameter Page offsets apply, allowing you to shift the parameter addressing up and
down.
Key
If you choose the Key option in the Class menu, a key press is emulated. A field appears
below the Class menu, allowing you to input the desired key.
Key Command
If you choose the Key Command option in the Class menu, a key command is executed.
A field appears below the Class menu, where the key command that should be
executed is displayed.
Some key commands provide on/off or enabled/disabled feedback. This can only be set
by using the Learn New Assignment button in the Key Commands window.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

39

If you want your key command assignment to be repeatedly executed, enable the Key
Repeat checkbox at the bottom of the Key Command Assignments Editor. For further
information, see “Key Repeat Checkbox” on page 44.
Control Surface Group
If you choose the Control Surface Group option in the Class menu, you can set a
property for the Control Surface Group that the assignment belongs to. A Parameter
menu appears below the Class menu, where you can choose between the options
described in “Control Surface Group Parameters” on page 19, with the additions listed
in the following table.
Note: Assignments for unsupported control surfaces always belong to the first Control
Surface Group.
Parameter Option

Additional Info

Current Mode Fader Bank Maps to the Fader Bank for the currently used View mode (Mixer, Global,
Arrange). This way, you need only one assignment per left/right button for
all View Modes.
Global View Filter

When this parameter is selected, eight additional switches for the eight
object classes are displayed when the View mode is Global. Depending on
the Value Mode, these switches define which objects are displayed (by
using “Direct” mode) or which are toggled (by using “X-OR” mode).

MIDI Tracks Fader Bank;
Inputs Fader Bank;
Audio Tracks Fader Bank;
Instruments Fader Bank;
Aux Fader Bank;
Busses Fader Bank;
Output Fader Bank;
User Fader Bank;

These Fader Bank parameters are used in Global View when only one
object class is displayed. This way, you can switch between several object
classes while retaining the current Fader Bank for each class.

If you choose a Fader Bank or Parameter Page option in the Parameter menu, the
following Bank Type options are also available.
 By One—The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by one track or parameter.
 By Bank—The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by the number of displayed
tracks or parameters.
 CS Group Setting—The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by the value defined
by the “Parameter Shift Mode” Control Surface Group Parameter.

40

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Automation Group
If you choose the Automation Group option in the Class menu, you can use the
assignment to set an automation group parameter.
A Parameter Group field that allows you to determine the edited group appears below
the Class menu. Current (entered with “0”) means the group selected in the Automation
Group Control Surface Group parameter.
The additional Parameter menu allows you to set the automation group parameter. For
further information, see the Group Settings section in the Logic Pro 7 Reference Manual.
MIDI Input
Incoming MIDI messages are only processed on MIDI Input. When this parameter is
changed, all other assignments using the same input will also have their input changed
accordingly. If the assignment belongs to a supported control surface, the device’s MIDI
Input will also change in the Setup window. This feature allows you to create default
assignments for a new control surface, which other users can use immediately. To do
so, they simply need to place your com.apple.Logic.cs preferences file into their
Preferences folder, open the Controller Assignments Editor and change one
assignment’s MIDI Input parameter in accordance with their MIDI setup.
Value Change
The incoming MIDI message(s) that cause a value change in the destination parameter
are displayed here. To edit these MIDI messages, switch to the Expert View by activating
the corresponding checkbox in the upper right corner of the Controller Assignments
Editor.
In the Expert View you’ll find two fields: the lower one is only a display that shows the
Value Change message in plain text. The upper field display allows the messages to be
viewed and edited as a sequence of bytes, displayed in hexadecimal. There are
placeholders for the variable part:
 Lo7: Low 7 bits of the value
 Hi7: High 7 bits of the value
If there is only a Lo7 placeholder in the message, the value is treated as 7 bit. If there is
also a Hi7 placeholder, the value is treated as 14 bit. The order of Lo7 and Hi7 is
honored, and there may be constant bytes in between. This allows you to define
Control Change LSB and MSB portions. As an example: B0 08 Hi7 B0 28 Lo7
Note: When entering multiple MIDI messages, do not use Running Status. Always write
down the entire MIDI message(s), ensuring that you repeat the status byte, even if it’s
the same.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

41

If the message does not contain Lo7 or Hi7 placeholders, an incoming value of 1 is
assumed. This is typical for pressed or released buttons. Also see the “Multiply” section
below.
Touch/Release
The incoming MIDI message(s) causes a change in the touched/released status of the
destination parameter. A non zero value means touched; a value of 0 means released.
The messages are displayed and entered in the same way as the Value Change field (see
the “Value Change” section above).
Note: This only applies to the Track assignment class and parameters that can be
automated.
Min/Max
Defines the minimum and maximum range for incoming values represented by Lo7
and Hi7. Typically, the full range of 0–127 is used, but some control surfaces may use the
same message with different value ranges for different controls (CM Labs Motor Mix, for
example).
Format
Defines the way negative values are encoded in the 7-bit portions sent over MIDI. You
can choose between the following options:
 Unsigned—No negative values are possible. The full 7 or 14 bit range is treated as a
positive number. This results in a value range of 0 to 127 or 0 to 16383.
 2's complement—If the most significant bit is set, the value is negative. To obtain the
absolute value, invert all bits and add 1. This results in a value range of –128 to 127 or
–8192 to 8191.
 1's complement—If the most significant bit is set, the value is negative. To set the
absolute value, invert all bits. Note that this allows two possible encoding values for
zero. This results in a value range of –127 to 127 or –8191 to 8191.
 Sign Magnitude—If the most significant bit is set, the value is negative. To set the
absolute value, clear the most significant bit. Note that this allows two possible
encoding values for zero. This results in a value range of –127 to 127 or –8191 to 8191.
The appropriate format that should be used is usually documented in your control
surface user manual. If unavailable, check the control surface manufacturer’s website,
or contact them via phone.
Multiply
Allows the incoming value to be scaled. Especially useful for button presses that have a
value of 1. Examples: to set the automation mode to Write, set Multiply to 4.00 and
Mode to Direct. To decrement a parameter by 1 with a button press, set Multiply to
−1.00 and Mode to Relative. The 1 and –1 menu items in the combo box’s menu
conveniently enter the most commonly used values of 1 and –1

42

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Mode
Defines the way the incoming value modifies the current parameter value. You can
choose between the following parameters:
 Direct—The incoming value is the new parameter value.
 Toggle—If the parameter’s current value is 0, it is set to the incoming value.
Otherwise it is set to 0. This option is useful for buttons which toggle a value: Mute,
Solo, and so on.
 Scale—The incoming value is scaled from its value range to the destination
parameter’s value range. Most useful for faders and rotary pots.
 Relative—The incoming value is added to the parameter’s current value. Used by
encoders, but also for buttons that increment/decrement by a certain amount (set by
the Multiply parameter).
 Rotate—The incoming value is added to the parameter’s current value, cycling
between maximum and minimum values. This is useful for button presses that cycle
between modes: automation mode, for example.
 X-OR—The value defines a bit mask which is applied to the parameter’s current value
with the “exclusive or” Boolean operation. Useful for enabling/disabling single Object
types in Global View.
Feedback
Defines the way the parameter’s current value is displayed on the control surface. You
can choose between the following options:
 None—No feedback is sent.
 Single Dot/Line—LED rings: only one LED; LCDs: a single vertical line.
 Left to Right Bar—A bar from the minimum to the current value.
 Right to Left Bar—A bar from the current value to the maximum.
 Q/Spread—A bar from the center to the current value.
 Ascending Bar LCDs—A bar from the bottom to the current value.
 Descending Bar LCDs—A bar from the top to the current value.
 Text Only—LED rings: no feedback; LCDs: no feedback as a graphic element.
 Automatic—Dependent on the currently assigned parameter, the most suitable
feedback mode is used: Plug-in and Instrument parameters carry this information,
Pan uses Single Dot/Line, all other parameters use Left to Right Bar.
Note: Feedback only works for supported control surfaces, and not all settings are
available for all controls.
Text Feedback Checkbox
If enabled, a textual representation of the current value is sent to the control surface’s
display. The plug-in determines the display position and number of characters that are
used.

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

43

Local Feedback (Fader/Knob) Checkbox
If enabled, no feedback is sent while the parameter is in Touched mode. This prevents
motorized faders from “fighting” against the user.
Key Repeat Checkbox
When you enable the Key Repeat checkbox, the assignment is repeatedly executed.
The Key Repeat Rate slider—set in the Mac OS X Keyboard & Mouse preferences—
determines how quickly Logic repeats the assignment. The duration that the button/
controller must be held for, before the assignment is repeated, is set with the Delay
Until Repeat slider in the Keyboard & Mouse preferences.
Example: This facility is particularly useful for the zoom function: If you assign a key
repeat command to the Zoom buttons on the Logic Control, for example, you can
simply hold down the Zoom In button. Logic will zoom in until the Zoom In button is
released. This mirrors the behavior of the Zoom key commands. In earlier versions, you
had to repeatedly press the (Logic Control) Zoom buttons to zoom in/out more than
one level.
Note: The Key Repeat checkbox is only available for key commands, key presses and
relative value changes. If any other assignment class is selected, the checkbox is
dimmed.
Logic Pro factory key command assignments already support the Key Repeat function
(if useful and/or applicable to the control surface/device)—making changes
unnecessary for use of this new functionality.
If you want to enable the Key Repeat function for your own assignments, you may
need to use the re-learn option for the assigned message. Key Repeat messages must
include the Lo7 byte, which provides information on the up (released) or down
(pressed) state of the assigned button.
Logic guides you through the re-learning process: The current MIDI message is
automatically cleared, Learn mode is activated, and a Help tag prompts you to send the
desired MIDI message.
Releasing the assigned button—after learning the MIDI message—automatically
creates the Lo7 byte, and assigns the Lo7 value for the button release message to the
Min parameter. The Lo7 value for the „button pressed“ message is automatically
assigned to the Max parameter.
Typically, the value range of 1–127 is used for the button pressed message. The zero (0)
value is generally used for button released.

44

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

Note: Some control surfaces may use different value ranges (CM Labs MotorMix, for
example). Assigning the used value range to the desired Min and Max values ensures
that key repeat also works with such devices. This, however, also means that you need
to take care when manually changing the Min or Max value for a key command (in
cases where the Min and Max values do not match the button on and button release
(off ) states, the complete assignment will not work). Please consult your control surface
manual for further information about the values used.

About Modal Dialogs
All modal dialogs (except file selector boxes) are shown on control surfaces that feature
text displays.
Modal dialogs do not allow you to perform actions in any other window when visible.
As examples, authorization warnings, edit confirmations, or error messages.
When these windows “pop up” on-screen, the upper LCD row (if applicable) shows the
first part, or all, of the alert text.
If the dialog text does not fit into the LCD’s upper row, it will start scrolling after three
seconds. You can scroll the dialog text manually with the appropriate control (see
assignment tables in the appropriate chapter). Once you start doing so, automatic
scrolling is disabled.
 If there is an Enter or OK button on the control surface, it triggers the dialog’s default
button, where applicable.
 If there is a Cancel or Exit button on the control surface, it triggers the button labeled
Cancel or Abort, where applicable.
 All buttons (push buttons, including Enter/default and Cancel, as well as checkboxes
and radio buttons, but not pop-up buttons) are shown in the display’s lower row.
Pressing a control surface button below the display triggers the appropriate button/
function in the dialog, if applicable. Following use of the Enter/Cancel button on the
control surface or with the mouse, the dialog will disappear, and all controls and
displays will return to their previous state.
When a file select box is onscreen, a There is a file select dialog on the screen
message appears on the LCD or other display (if applicable to your control surface).

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

45

Tips
Control surfaces change the way you use Logic, and are most effective if you make a
few small modifications to your working methods. The following collection of hints will
help you to work more smoothly and efficiently with your control surface/Logic system.
Customize your Template/Autoload Songs
 Set up Screensets 1–7 to your liking. These can be accessed directly with some
control surfaces (on a Logic/Mackie Control—via Function Keys—F1 to F7. Function
Key 8 (F8) will close the top-most window).
 It is recommended that a full-screen Arrange window, with Track Automation View
set to on, is among your Screensets.
 A full-screen Track Mixer window is also recommended.
Make Use of Markers
Not much more can be said. Markers allow you to quickly navigate from location to
location in a project. Most control surfaces feature a number of shortcuts that allow
you to rapidly switch between Markers.
Markers are very useful for the creation/selection of Cycle areas and a number of other
tasks, such as Drop In and Replace.
If you tend to follow a particular song structure, or like to work with a particular
number of bars (4, 8, 16 bars, and so on) for verse and chorus sections, then set up a
number of Markers at suitable locations in your Template/Autoload songs.
Always use Projects
As soon as Logic is launched, and the desired Template or Autoload song is loaded, you
should routinely create a new project folder, and name it. This will provide a default
folder structure/file path that contains the song file and all audio files associated with
the project.
You can also choose to include plug-in Settings files, video files, Space Designer IR files
and EXS Instruments into your Project folder, if desired.
The button assigned to Save operations on your control surface will open the File Save
dialog. Once the project/song has been saved once, pressing the “Save” button will
incrementally save the project without launching the File Save dialog window.

46

Chapter 1 Control Surface Setup

2

Logic Control

2

This chapter will introduce you to using Logic with a Logic/
Mackie Control unit.
The Logic Control and Mackie Control Universal units are functionally identical. All
information in this chapter (as appropriate for the device) applies to the Mackie Control
Universal, the Mackie Extender, and the C4.
To use Logic with a Logic/Mackie Control unit, you need:
 a Logic/Mackie Control unit.
 Logic Pro 7.1, or newer.

Set Up
A powered Logic/Mackie Control unit will be automatically detected when Logic Pro is
launched. You can use the Logic/Mackie Control in an independent control surface
group (with other control surface icons placed above/below the Logic/Mackie Control
icon), or combined into one control surface group with one or more control surfaces
(such as Logic/Mackie Control XT or C4 units—place the icon(s) to the right of the
existing icon(s).

Foot Switches
The foot switch sockets can use momentary foot pedals with either a positive or
negative polarity. By default:
 USER SWITCH A is assigned to Start/Stop.
 USER SWITCH B is assigned to Record (note that a track must be selected and armed
for recording to take place),
 EXTERNAL CONTROL is assigned to the MASTERfader level. Only use an expression
pedal with this socket.

47

The polarity of the foot switches is determined by the Logic Control when powered up.
As such, you should first connect the foot switches, then turn the power on.
LCD

Assignment display

Time display

Assignment buttons
Display buttons

V-Pots

Function keys
Rec Rdy, Solo, Mute,
and Select buttons

Channel buttons

Control buttons
Faders

Transport

Cursor buttons

Jog Wheel

Topics in this chapter are broken down into “Zones” of the Logic Control surface.

The Displays
The Logic Control features four displays, in addition to LEDs associated with individual
switches:
 Main LCD
 Assignment LED
 Song Position/SMPTE Time display
 Solo LED
The following section discusses these displays.

48

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Each channel/parameter can be indicated by a name or value. In general, the upper
row of each channel/parameter will display an abbreviated form of the track name, and
the lower row will display the (abbreviated) parameter name and/or value.
In some modes, a long (full, in other words) parameter or other name will be displayed
briefly on-screen, when adjusted. The display of long names, and the duration of this
display, is set in the Control Surfaces preferences. These settings are discussed in the
Logic Reference manual.
Note: 8-bit ASCII characters such as curly quotes and umlaut characters are replaced by
the best-possible 7-bit ASCII equivalent. As examples: ä = ae, ö=oe, ü=ue, á = a, ø = oe,
œ = oe, ß = ss, å = a.

Assignment LED (Mode Display)
The Logic/Mackie Control features a two digit, seven-segment LED display which
indicates the current assignment status (also referred to as the mode display).
A period is shown at the bottom-right of the display whenever a Channel Strip view is
active.

Song Position/SMPTE Time Display
The Logic/Mackie Control includes a multi-digit, seven-segment LED. It is accompanied
by two small LEDs which provide a quick visual indication of the currently active
display format: SMPTE or BEATS.
When BEATS mode is selected, the Position/Time Display is divided into four segments,
separated as follows:
Bars/Beats/Sub Divisions/Ticks
When SMPTE mode is selected, the Position/Time Display is divided into four segments,
separated as follows:
Hours/Minutes/Seconds/Frames
The display format can be viewed in a number of ways. This can be altered in the
Display preferences.

Solo LED
This LED indicates that either: an audio track is set to solo, or the track solo mode is
enabled. It is a helpful visual aid in situations where a track has been soloed and the
fader bank has been shifted—making the soloed track’s Solo LED invisible on the
control surface.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

49

The Channel Strip(s)
As each channel strip is identical, the information discussed in this section applies
equally to all eight channel strips on the Logic Control and Logic Control XT units.

V-Pot/V-Select
This “soft” potentiometer can be used to adjust the send level and pan, plus any other
parameter for EQ, instruments, effects, and so on. The V-Pot can also be used to scroll
through and choose items—such as plug-ins, Audio Instruments and more—from
menus, and to determine destinations for sends.

The V-Pot also contains an integrated V-Select push button. This button generally sets a
“default” parameter value (where a parameter has more than two possible values), or
switches between two parameter values (on/off ). The V-Select can also be used to
activate a function, selected through use of the V-Pot. As an example, the V-Pot can be
rotated in order to select an effect plug-in for a particular channel Insert slot. Once the
desired effect is displayed in the LCD, a simple press downwards on the top of the VPot will activate the V-Select button. In the example given, this would select, and insert,
the effect and launch the Plug-in window. On occasion, the V-Select is used to switch
to a special Assignment mode.
The current value of any parameter being adjusted by the V-Pot is displayed on the LCD
(dependent on the Name/Value setting), and is also indicated by the ring of LEDs which
surround it. The various LED “ring” displays are shown here:

This will vary as follows, dependent on the selected parameter:
 Connected series of LED segments from left to right (send level, for example)
 Single segment (panorama or frequency, for example)
 Connected series of LED segments, starting in the center position and fanning to the
left or right (EQ gain, for example)
 Series of connected LED segments, starting in the center position and fanning to the
left and right (Q-Factor, for example)
 An LED dot below the V-Pot indicates the centered/default position of the parameter

50

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Holding down the x/ALT button sets the V-Pots to high resolution parameter
adjustment (fine) mode, where applicable.

Holding down the OPTION button, and turning the V-Pot, switches between the
minimum, default, and maximum parameter value.

Rec/Rdy (Record/Ready) Button
This button arms or disables the channel for recording. Each channel features an
independent Rec/Rdy LED which is lit when a track is armed for recording.

Holding down the OPTION button, while pressing any channel’s REC/RDY button will
disarm all tracks.
In Global view, if you arm an audio channel which is currently not used by any track in
the song, and then start recording, you will be asked if you want to create a new track
with this audio channel in the current recording folder.

Signal LED
Indicates the presence of any outgoing MIDI or audio signal. When recording, the
presence of an incoming signal will be indicated.

SOLO Button
For isolating a channel’s signal. Each channel features an independent Solo LED which
illuminates when a track is soloed. The Rude Solo LED—just to the right of the Position/
Time Display LED—also illuminates whenever any track is soloed.
Holding down the OPTION button, while pressing any channel’s SOLO button will
disable solo for all tracks.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

51

In the Send Destination/Level views (see “Send Assignment Modes” on page 61), the
SOLO button controls the Pre/Post mode selection—in both Multi Channel and
Channel Strip views.

MUTE Button
Used to defeat the track’s signal. Each channel features an independent Mute LED
which illuminates when a track is muted.
Holding down the OPTION button, while pressing any MUTE button will unmute all
tracks.

In the EQ Frequency/Gain and Send Destination/Level views, the MUTE button controls
the EQ bypass or Send mute function. This affects both Multi Channel and Channel
Strip views.

SELECT Button
This button is used to select a channel for channel-based editing or assignment
commands. Each channel features an independent SELECT LED which illuminates when
a track is selected.
When holding down the SHIFT button, pressing any channel SELECT button will set the
track’s volume to unity level (0 dB).
While holding down SHIFT, a SELECT button’s LED indicates if the track’s volume is set
to 0 dB.
When holding down the OPTION button, pressing any channel SELECT button will
create a new track (assigned to the same instrument of the selected track), and switch
to Arrange view.
When holding down the SHIFT and OPTION buttons, pressing any channel SELECT
button will create a new track (with the next instrument, following the selected track),
and switch to Arrange view.

52

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Touch-Sensitive Motor Fader
These 100 millimeter faders control channel levels. When Flip mode is activated, the
parameter currently assigned to the V-Pot can be controlled with the fader. This allows
you to more easily control pans, aux returns, MIDI track parameters, EQs, plug-in, Audio
Instrument, or other channel parameter levels/values. Movement of the eight faders is
relative to the activity of the currently chosen bank of on-screen faders. The fader bank
is shifted when one of the FADER BANK buttons is pressed.

Fader behavior in other modes
 In Flip mode: duplicates or swaps with V-Pot of same channel.
 In Surround Angle/Diversity view: adjusts surround diversity.
 In EQ Frequency/Gain view: adjusts gain of selected EQ band.
 In Send Destination/Level Multi Channel view: adjusts send level of selected send.
 In Send Destination/Level Channel Strip view: adjusts send level of send on selected
track.

Changing Parameters and Values
Individual parameters can be adjusted via the associated V-Pot (or fader, if the FLIP
button is active), located directly below the parameter entry in the LCD.
To do so, simply grab and turn the desired V-Pot. Once the required parameter value is
visible in the LCD, simply release the knob.
Press the V-Select button to set the default value (for parameters that have more than
two values), or switch between two values (for parameters with only two possibilities,
such as on/off ).

Chapter 2 Logic Control

53

Some parameters require confirmation, such as the selection of plug-ins, Audio
Instruments, sends, inputs, outputs, and so on. For these types of parameters, press the
V-Select button (press down on the top of the V-Pot) to activate/select the desired
value. In the case of a plug-in or Audio Instrument, this will automatically launch the
Plug-in window in Logic. For a send, the confirmed channel send destination will be
activated in the Logic mixer(s).
When a value has been pre-selected, but not confirmed/instantiated (such as send
destination, plug-in insertion and so on) the value will flash until the V-Select button is
pressed.
An exponential increase in value changes will occur as a V-Pot is rotated more quickly.

The Assignment Zone
The small light gray area just below the mode display contains six buttons.

These ASSIGNMENT buttons work in both Track and Global view modes. View modes
are discussed in “Track View Mode” on page 20.
When these buttons are pressed, the mode display, plus the LED associated with each
button, will update to reflect the currently selected assignment mode. The LCD will also
update to display the parameters relevant to the selected assignment. These
parameters are, of course, assigned to the corresponding V-Pots.
All ASSIGNMENT buttons work as switches, which means that if you click them
repeatedly, they will switch between the Multi Channel and Channel Strip view modes.
 Multi Channel view—you see the same parameter for multiple channels. In Multi
Channel view, the mode display does not show a period—Example: P1
 Channel Strip view—you see multiple parameters for a single channel. In Channel
Strip view, the mode display shows a period to the right—Example: P1.
Switching between Multi Channel and Channel Strip views is achieved by pressing the
selected ASSIGNMENT button multiple times.
If you press an ASSIGNMENT button which is not currently selected, the Assignment
mode changes, and the view switches to Multi Channel view. Exception: Switching
between Instrument Edit view and Plug-in Edit view retains the Channel Strip view.

54

Chapter 2 Logic Control

The NAME/VALUE button also has an effect on what is shown on the LCD when in the
Multi Channel and Channel Strip views. More information can be found in “Display
Zone” on page 71.

Track Assignment Modes
The TRACK button selects Assignment modes which allow the editing of a number of
global track parameters. It switches between all displayed channels and the individual
parameters of the selected channel (Track Multi Channel view or Track Channel Strip
view). The parameters in Track Multi Channel view include: Volume, Pan, Track mode,
Track Input, Track Output, and Automation. In Track Channel Strip view you will see an
overview of the most important track parameters: Volume, Pan, Instrument, Insert 1,
Insert 2, Send 1 Level, Send 2 Level, and Send 3 Level.
Track Multi Channel View
Track Multi Channel view allows you to edit a single “global” track parameter for all
tracks: Volume, Pan, Track mode, Input, Output, or Automation. The parameter being
edited will be displayed briefly when switching to this mode.
 The mode display will show tr (for “Track”).
 The upper LCD row shows track names.
Audio1 Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8
Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume

Pressing NAME/VALUE switches the display mode to show parameter values in the
lower row:
Audio1 Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8
+0.1dB -1.8dB +01.dB -30.0 +0.0dB -50.2 -24.7 -1.2dB

As these display variants can be switched in all Multi Channel Strip views, the
following will only show displays in Value mode.
 Turning the V-Pots changes the associated track parameter.
 Pressing a V-Select sets the parameter to its default value.
 Cursor Left/Right buttons switch to the next or previous track parameter. The
selected parameter will be displayed briefly in the upper LCD row.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

55

Channel Strip View
Track Channel Strip view allows you to edit all parameters listed above, for the selected
track.
 The mode display will show tr. (track channel strip).
 The upper LCD row shows the name of the track and “Track parameters.”
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Volume Pan
Inst

Ins.1

Ins.2

Track parameters
Send 1 Send 2 Send 3

Pressing NAME/VALUE switches the display mode to show parameter names in the
upper row and parameter values in the lower row:
Volume Pan
+0.5dB 0

Inst
ES2

Ins.1 Ins.2 Send 1 Send 2 Send 3
Dstrtn AutFlt -54.0 -27.0 -oo dB

As these display variants can be switched in all Channel Strip views, the following will
only show displays in Value mode.
 V-Pot/V-Select 1—edits Volume. The lower LCD row shows the current track volumes,
either in dB or numeric format, depending on the settings of the underlying
Environment Objects.
 V-Pot/V-Select 2—edits Pan position. The lower LCD row shows the current track pan
value, ranging from minus 64 to plus 63. A value of 0 is the centered position. If
Surround is selected as the Output value, this controls the Surround Angle.
 V-Pot 3—selects the instrument of Audio Instrument tracks. Confirm with V-Select 3.
 V-Pot/V-Select 4 and 5—selects the plug-in used in Insert slots 1 and 2 (on audio and
Audio Instrument tracks). Confirm with V-Select.
 V-Pot/V-Select 6 to 8—edits the Send Level of Sends 1 to 3.
Holding SHIFT while pressing one of the MUTE or V-Select buttons switches between
mute or bypass:
 1 and 2—activates/deactivates the track’s Mute button.
 3—activates/deactivates Mute of the Audio Instrument used on the track.
 4 and 5—activates/deactivates Bypass of plug-ins used in Insert slots 1 and 2 (of
Audio and Audio Instrument tracks).
 6 to 8—activates/deactivates Mute of Sends 1 to 3.
Shortcuts Menu
Holding down the TRACK button accesses a further sub-menu in the LCD.
Volume Pan

TrkMod Input

Output Auto

Setup

 The mode display will show t_ (Track)
 V-Select 1 or F1—switches to Track Multi Channel view and selects Volume.

56

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â

 The LCD’s lower line shows the current volume of the tracks, in dB or numerically,
depending on the setting of the underlying Environment Object.
 Turning a V-Pot changes the volume.
 pressing a V-Select sets the volume to the default value.
V-Select 2 or F2—switches to Track Multi Channel view and selects Pan.
V-Select 3 or F3—switches to Track Multi Channel view and selects Track mode.
V-Select 4 or F4—switches to Track Multi Channel view and selects Input.
V-Select 5 or F5—switches to Track Multi Channel view and selects Output.
V-Select 6 or F6 —switches to Track Multi Channel view and selects Automation
mode.
V-Select 7 or F7—switches to Track Multi Channel view and displays the automation
parameter selected in the Arrange window. Also switches to Arrange view.
V-Select 8 or F8—switches to Track Setup Channel Strip view (see below).

Track Setup Channel Strip View
In this mode, rarely used parameters can be edited for the selected track.
 V-Pot/V-Select 1—edits Track mode (mono, stereo, left, right).
 V-Pot/V-Select 2—selects the Surround mode. Confirm with V-Select 2.
 V-Pot/V-Select 3—selects the Track Input. Confirm with V-Select 6.
 V-Pot/V-Select 4—selects the Track Output. Confirm with V-Select 7.
 V-Pot/V-Select 5—edits Automation mode.
 V-Pot/V-Select 6—edits track group membership. You can only choose one group or
“Off.” To make a track a member of multiple groups, use Group Edit mode (see
below).

Pan/Surround Assignment Modes
Briefly pressing the PAN/SURROUND button switches between Pan/Surround Multi
Channel and Pan/Surround Channel Strip view.
Multi Channel View
Pan/Surround Multi Channel view allows you to edit one pan/surround parameter on
all tracks: Angle or Pan (on non-surround tracks), Radius (diversity), LFE, Surround
mode (on surround tracks). The parameter being edited will be displayed briefly when
switching to this mode. Regardless of which surround parameter is selected and active,
non-surround tracks always display the standard Pan control.
In a song that contains both surround and non-surround tracks, you can edit a
specified surround parameter for surround tracks, while the V-Pot of non-surround
tracks will edit panning, as usual.
 The mode display will show Pn (Pan).
 The upper LCD row shows track names.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

57

Â Turning the V-Pots changes the pan/surround parameter.
 The Surround Angle parameter rotates between 0 and 359 degrees, avoiding any
angle limit.
 Pressing a V-Select sets the parameter to its default value.
 Cursor Left/Right switches to the next or previous surround parameter. The selected
parameter will be displayed briefly in the upper LCD row.

Channel Strip View
Pan/Surround Channel Strip view allows you to edit all surround parameters for the
selected track.
 The mode display will show Pn. (Pan/Surround channel strip).
 The upper LCD row shows the name of the track and “Pan/Surround.”
Track 1 "Audio 1"
SrrAng SrrDvr SrrLFE mode

Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â

Pan/Surround

V-Pot/V-Select 1—edits angle (or pan on non-surround tracks).
V-Pot/V-Select 2—edits diversity.
V-Pot/V-Select 3—edits LFE level.
V-Pot 4—selects the surround mode. Confirm with V-Select 4.
V-Pot/V-Select 5—edits Surround X.
V-Pot/V-Select 6—edits Surround Y.

The Angle/Diversity and X/Y pairs influence each other. Only the Angle/Diversity
parameters are automated and recorded.
Alternate Mode Options
Holding down the PAN/SURROUND button accesses a further sub-menu in the LCD:
Angle

Radius LFE

mode

CStrip

Ang/Dv

V-Select 1 or F1—switches to Pan/Surround Multi Channel view and selects angle.
V-Select 2 or F2—switches to Pan/Surround Multi Channel view and selects diversity.
V-Select 3 or F3—switches to Pan/Surround Multi Channel view and selects LFE level.
V-Select 4 or F4—switches to Pan/Surround Multi Channel view and selects surround
mode.
 V-Select 6 or F5—switches to Pan/Surround Channel Strip view.
 V-Select 7 or F6—switches to Surround Angle/Diversity Multi Channel view:
 the mode display will show Ad (Angle/Diversity).
Â
Â
Â
Â

58

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Â the upper LCD row shows track names.
 the lower LCD row shows the surround angle currently assigned to each track.
 turning a V-Pot changes the surround angle (or adjusts pan position on nonsurround tracks).
 pressing a V-Select sets the surround angle to its default value.
 the faders edit surround diversity.
 V-Select 8 or F7—switches to Surround X/Y Multi Channel view:
 the mode display will show XY (X/Y—the X character is not available on a
7 segment display).
 the upper LCD row shows track names.
 the lower LCD row shows the surround X value currently assigned to each track.
 turning a V-Pot changes the surround X value (or adjusts pan position on nonsurround tracks).
 pressing a V-Select sets surround X to its default value.
 the faders edit surround Y.
Notes on Surround X/Y Editing
X and Y have a value range of –1000 to +1000, but the resolution is not that high, as
surround positions are currently recorded as 7 bit data.
Note: The X and Y parameters are limited to a rectangular coordinate system. As such,
value pairs outside the surround circle are not possible. When trying to set a value
which would lead to an invalid position, the other coordinate is automatically adjusted
to a valid position. Example: moving Y to +1000 will result in an X coordinate value of
0.
When editing only one coordinate, the other coordinate of the most recently track is
remembered. This aids in the creation of linear (straight) lines of movement.

EQ Assignment Modes
Briefly pressing the EQ button switches between EQ Multi Channel view or EQ Channel
Strip view.
Note: If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected track, a Channel EQ
will be inserted automatically when the EQ Channel Strip view is entered.
Multi Channel View
EQ Multi Channel view allows you to edit one equalizer parameter for all
tracks: Frequency, Gain, Q, or EQ bypass. The EQ band number, and parameter being
edited will be displayed for one second when switching to this mode.
 The mode display will show E1 to E8, dependent on the selected EQ band number.
 The upper LCD row shows track names.
 Turning the V-Pots changes the EQ parameter.
Chapter 2 Logic Control

59

Â Pressing a V-Select sets the parameter to its default value.
 Cursor Up/Down switches to the next or previous EQ band.
 Cursor Left/Right switches to the next or previous EQ parameter. The selected
parameter will be displayed briefly in the upper LCD row.
 Pressing a MUTE button while the SHIFT button is held down switches the current EQ
band’s Bypass status.
 When Flip mode is enabled, the MUTE buttons display and edit the current EQ band’s
Bypass status.
Channel Strip View
EQ Channel Strip view allows you to edit all EQ parameters—in all bands—for the
selected track.
 The mode display will show EQ. (EQ channel strip).
 The upper LCD row shows the name of the track, “EQs,” the page number and total
number of pages—Example: “Page 1/2”.
 V-Pot/V-Select 1—edits the Frequency of odd-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 2—edits Gain of odd-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 3—edits Q-Factor of odd-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 4—edits Bypass of odd-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 5—edits the Frequency of even-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 6—edits Gain of even-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 7—edits Q-Factor of even-numbered EQ bands.
 V-Pot/V-Select 8—edits Bypass of even-numbered EQ bands.
 Cursor Left/Right switches to the next or previous EQ band. The number of EQ bands
displayed on the LCD depends on the number of Logic Control (XT) units (two EQ
bands are shown per unit) available.

Alternate Mode Options
Holding down the EQ button accesses a further sub-menu in the LCD:
 The mode display shows E_ or E_., dependent on whether you were in EQ Multi
Channel or EQ Channel Strip view.
 V-Select 1 or F1—switches to EQ Multi Channel view and selects Frequency.
 V-Select 2 or F2—switches to EQ Multi Channel view and selects Gain
 V-Select 3 or F3—switches to EQ Multi Channel view and selects Q.
 V-Select 4 or F4—switches to EQ Multi Channel view and selects Bypass.
 V-Select 6 or F6—switches to EQ Channel Strip view.

60

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Â V-Select 7 or F7—switches to Frequency/Gain Multi Channel view. In this mode you
can edit the Frequency and Gain parameters of a specific EQ band (1 to 8) for all
tracks.
 the mode display will show F1 to F8, depending on the selected EQ band.
 the upper LCD row shows track names.
 the lower LCD row shows the Frequency of the selected EQ.
 turning a V-Pot changes EQ Frequency.
 pressing a V-Select sets the EQ Frequency to its default value.
 use the Mute buttons to Bypass the EQ.
 use the faders adjust the EQ Gain.
 V-Select 8 or F8—switches to Frequency/Gain Channel Strip view. In this mode you
can edit the Frequency and Gain parameters for all EQ bands of the selected track.
Each pair of channel strips corresponds to one of the EQ bands.
 the mode display will show FG.
 V-Pots 1 to 8 control the Frequency of EQ bands 1 to 8.
 Mute buttons 1 to 8 control the Bypass of EQ bands 1 to 8.
 Faders 1 to 8 control the Gain of EQ bands 1 to 8.
Note that the faders form a frequency response curve in this mode, if the EQ bands
have ascending frequency values.
You can edit another track’s EQ, without leaving this view mode, by simply selecting
the track.

Send Assignment Modes
Briefly pressing the SEND button switches between Send Multi Channel or Send
Channel Strip view.
Multi Channel View
Send Multi Channel view allows you to edit one Send parameter for all
tracks: Destination, Level, Position, and Mute. The Send slot number, and parameter
being edited will be displayed for one second when switching to this mode.
 The mode display will show S1 to S8, depending on the selected Send slot.
 The upper LCD row shows track names.
 Turning the V-Pots changes the Send parameter.
 Pressing a V-Select confirms the pre-selected Send Destination and sets the other
send parameters to their defaults.
 Cursor Up/Down switches to the next or previous Send slot.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

61

Â Cursor Left/Right switches to the next or previous Send parameter. The selected
parameter will be displayed briefly in the upper LCD row.

 Pressing a MUTE button while the SHIFT button is held switches the current Send’s
Mute status.
 When Flip mode is enabled, the MUTE buttons display and edit the current Send’s
Mute status.
Note: Ensure that the ZOOM button isn’t active when using the cursor buttons.
Channel Strip View
Send Channel Strip view allows you to edit all Send parameters for the selected track.
 The mode display will show SE. (Send channel strip).
 The upper LCD row shows the name of the track, “Sends”, the page number and total
number of pages—Example: “Page 1/4”
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Sends
Snd3Ds Send 3 Snd3Ps Snd3Mt Snd4Ds Send 4

Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â

Page 1/2
Snd4Ps Snd4Mt

V-Pot/V-Select 1—edits Destination of odd-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 2—edits Level of odd-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 3—edits Position (pre/post) of odd-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 4—edits Mute of odd-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 5—edits Destination of even-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 6—edits Level of even-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 7—edits Position (pre/post) of even-numbered Sends.
V-Pot/V-Select 8—edits Mute of even-numbered Sends.
The horizontal cursor buttons shift between pages. The number of Sends displayed
simultaneously is dependent on the number of Logic Control XTs you have.

Alternate Edit Mode Options
Holding down the SEND button accesses a further sub-menu in the LCD:
 The mode display shows S_ or S_., depending on whether you were in Send Multi
Channel or Send Channel Strip view.
Dest

62

Pos

Level

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Mute

CStrip CSt2

Ds/LvM Ds/LvC

Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â

V-Select 1 or F1—switches to Send Multi Channel view and selects Destination.
V-Select 2 or F2—switches to Send Multi Channel view and selects Send Level.
V-Select 3 or F3—switches to Send Multi Channel view and selects Position.
V-Select 4 or F4—switches to Send Multi Channel view and selects Mute.
V-Select 5 or F5—switches to Send Channel Strip view.
V-Select 6 or F6—switches to Send Channel Strip 2 view:
This mode is similar to Send Channel Strip view, but parameters are arranged in a
slightly different way. You can control one parameter of all Send slots for the selected
track.
 The mode display will show SE. (Send channel strip).
 The upper LCD row shows the name of the track, “Sends”, the page number and
total number of pages.
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Sends
Page 1/2
Snd1Ds Snd2Ds Snd3Ds Snd4Ds Snd5Ds Snd6Ds Snd7Ds Snd7Ds

 V-Pot/V-Select 1 to 8—edits the displayed parameter.
 The horizontal cursor buttons shift between pages. The number of parameters
displayed simultaneously is dependent on the number of Logic Control XTs you
have.

 V-Select 7 or F7—switches to Destination/Level Multi Channel view:
In this mode, you can control one Send slot for all tracks. Each channel strip
corresponds to the track shown in the upper LCD row.
 the mode display will show d1 to d8, depending on the selected Send.
 the upper LCD row shows track names.
 the lower LCD row shows the destination of the selected Send.
 turning a V-Pot pre-selects the Send Destination.
 pressing a V-Select confirms the pre-selected Send Destination.
 the SOLO buttons edit Send Position— a lit SOLO LED indicates Pre Fader mode.
 the MUTE buttons edit Send Mute.
 the faders edit Send Level.
 V-Select 8 or F8—switches to Destination/Level Channel Strip view:
You can control all Send slots for the selected track in this mode. Each channel strip
corresponds to the (embossed) Send number shown below the LCD.
 the mode display will show dL.
 turning a V-Pot pre-selects the corresponding Send Destination.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

63

Â
Â
Â
Â

pressing a V-Select confirms a preselected Send Destination.
the Solo buttons edit Send Position—a lit Solo LED indicates Pre Fader mode.
the MUTE buttons edit Send Mute.
the faders edit Send Gain.

If one or more Sends are activated on multiple channels, you can switch between them
in the Channel Strip views by simply pressing the SELECT button for the desired
channel.

Plug-in Assignment Modes
Pressing PLUG-IN switches between Plug-in Multi Channel or Plug-in Channel Strip
view.
Note: There is one exception to this behavior: if you are in Instrument Edit view,
pressing this button switches to Plug-in Edit view.
Multi Channel View
This mode shows the plug-ins associated with a particular Insert slot for all channels.
 The mode display will show P1 to P9, or simply 10 to 16, dependent on the selected
Plug-in Insert slot number. Note that if an Audio Instrument channel is selected, the
display will show P1 to P9 and 10 to 15.
 The upper LCD row shows track names.
 The lower LCD row shows the currently selected plug-in for this Insert slot. Muted
plug-ins are shown with an asterisk * that precedes the plug-in name.
 Turning the V-Pots pre-selects a new plug-in. The plug-in name flashes until
confirmed with the V-Select.
 Turning another channel’s V-Pot will cancel any earlier pre-selection, and will start
pre-selection on the newly selected track.
 Pressing a V-Select:
 confirms/activates the pre-selected plug-in (assuming that you’ve made your preselection by turning the V-Pot).
 opens a Plug-in window, if none are opened. If a Plug-in window is open, and Link
mode is enabled, the selection of another plug-in will replace the existing Plug-in
window.
 switches to Plug-in Edit view.
 The Cursor Up/Down buttons change the currently displayed plug-in Insert slot (1 to
15).
 Pressing a V-Select or the MUTE button while the SHIFT button is held down will
mute/unmute the plug-in.

64

Chapter 2 Logic Control

To remove a plug-in:
1 Pre-select the “--” value (by turning the V-Pot fully counter-clockwise)
2 Press the V-Select of the appropriate Insert slot.
Logic Control will not switch to Plug-in Edit view, and no Plug-in window will be
launched. If one was previously opened, it will be closed (if Link mode is inactive).
Channel Strip View
This mode shows the plug-ins associated with all Insert slots for the selected channel.
 The mode display will show PL.
 The upper LCD row shows Ins1Pl through Ins8Pl
 The lower LCD row shows the plug-in which is currently selected for this insert slot.
Muted plug-ins are indicated by an asterisk *, which precedes the plug-in name.
 Turning the V-Pots pre-selects a new plug-in. The plug-in name flashes until
activated.
 Turning another channel’s V-Pot will cancel any previous pre-selection and will start
pre-selection on the newly selected track.
 Pressing a V-Select:
 activates the pre-selected plug-in (assuming that you’ve made your pre-selection
by turning the V-Pot).
 opens a Plug-in window if none are opened (if a Plug-in window is open and Link
mode is enabled, the selection of another plug-in will replace the existing plug-in).
 switches to Plug-in Edit view.
 Pressing a V-Select while the SHIFT button is held will mute/unmute the plug-in.
To remove a plug-in:
1 Pre-select the “--” value (by turning the V-Pot fully counter-clockwise).
2 Press the V-Select linked to the appropriate Insert slot.
Logic Control will not switch to Plug-in Edit view, and no Plug-in window will be
launched. If one was previously opened, it will be closed (if Link mode is inactive).
Plug-in Edit View
 The mode display will show P1. to P8., depending on the number of the selected
plug-in Insert slot.
 Dependent on the Name/Value button, the LCD display will change in the following
ways between the two modes:
 Name: The upper LCD row shows the track’s name, insert number, plug-in name,
current parameter page and total number of parameter pages.
The lower LCD row shows the name of the parameter which can be edited via the
V-Pot located below.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

65

Â Value: The upper LCD row shows the name of the parameter which can be edited
via the V-Pot positioned below.
The lower LCD row shows the current value of the parameter edited with the V-Pot.
If there is sufficient onscreen space, the unit type will be added—Example: Hz.
 Turning the V-Pots changes parameters.
 Pressing a V-Select sets the parameter to its default value, except where the
parameter only has two values (on/off, for example). In this case, pressing the VSelect switches between these values.
 The Cursor Left/Right buttons switch to the next or previous parameter page.

Note: When shifting by a “page” of parameters, the display is “quantized” to integer
pages. As an example:
 the plug-in has 19 parameters.
 Logic Control shows parameters 1 to 8.
 Cursor Right shifts to display parameters 9 to 16.
 Cursor Right shifts to display parameters 12 to 19.
 Cursor Left shifts back to display parameters 9 to 16, not parameters 4 to 11.
This way, you always revert to the page positions you expect to find, and are
comfortable with.
 To switch by a single parameter, rather than by “page,” hold down the x/ALT key
while pressing the Cursor Left/Right button.
 The Cursor Up/Down buttons change the currently displayed plug-in Insert slot (1 to
15).

Note: If you have a control surface group consisting of several physical Logic Control
and XT units, the parameters are distributed across their displays. The number of
parameters shown is dependent on the Multiple Controls Per Parameter settings in the
Preferences > Control Surfaces > Preferences, as discussed in the Control Surface Setup
chapter.
When exiting Plug-in Edit view, the Plug-in window will be closed.

66

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Compatibility
Logic Control can edit all plug-ins that can be automated. The plug-in type (Logic
native, TDM, Audio Units) is irrelevant.
Some third-party manufacturer plug-ins unfortunately don’t provide parameter names
and/or values as text. In such cases, parameters are enumerated as “Control #1,”
“Control #2” and so on, with values displayed as numbers ranging between 0 and 1000.
Please contact the plug-in manufacturer to obtain a version which supports this
feature.

Instrument Assignment Modes
Pressing the INSTRUMENT button switches to Instrument Multi Channel view.
Please note that when in Plug-in Edit view, pressing the INSTRUMENT button will
switch to Instrument Edit view.
If you can’t see the Audio Instrument Objects, use the BANK or CHANNEL buttons in
the FADER BANKS zone, or switch to Global view by pressing the AUDIO INSTRUMENT
button. (This assumes that you have created at least one or more Audio Instrument
Objects in the Environment.)
Multi Channel View
This mode shows the Instrument slot for all channels.
 The mode display will show In (Instrument)
 The upper LCD row shows track names.
 The lower LCD row shows the currently selected instrument. Muted instrument
names are preceded by an asterisk *.
 Turning the V-Pots pre-selects a new instrument. The pre-selected instrument name
flashes until activated.
 Turning another channel’s V-Pot will cancel any previous pre-selection and will start
pre-selection on the newly selected track.
 Pressing a V-Select:
 activates the pre-selected instrument plug-in (assuming that you’ve made your
pre-selection by turning the V-Pot).
 opens a Plug-in window, if none are opened. If a Plug-in window is open, and Link
mode is enabled, the selection of another Instrument plug-in will replace the
existing one.
 switches to Instrument Edit view.
 Pressing a V-Select or MUTE button while the SHIFT button is held down mute/
unmutes the Instrument.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

67

To remove an instrument:
1 Pre-select the “--” value (by turning the V-Pot fully counter-clockwise)
2 Press the V-Select button.
Logic Control will not switch to Instrument Edit view, and no Plug-in window will be
launched. If one was previously opened, it will be closed.
Instrument Edit View
 The mode display will show In.
 Dependent on the NAME/VALUE button, the LCD changes in the following ways:
 Name—The upper LCD row shows the track’s name, instrument name, current
parameter page and total number of parameter pages. The lower LCD row shows
the name of the parameter that can be edited with the V-Pot directly below it.
 Value—The upper LCD row shows the name of the parameter that can be edited
with the V-Pot below it. The lower LCD row shows the current value of the
parameter being edited. If there is sufficient space on the LCD row, the unit type is
shown after the value. Example: Hz.
 Turning a V-Pot changes the corresponding parameter.
 Pressing a V-Select sets the parameter to its default value, except where the
parameter only has two values (on/off, for example). In this case, pressing the VSelect switches between these values.
Compatibility
Logic Control can edit all instruments that can be automated. The plug-in type (Logic
native, TDM, Audio Units) is irrelevant.
Some third-party manufacturer instruments unfortunately don’t provide parameter
names and/or values as text. In such cases, parameters are enumerated as “Control #1,”
“Control #2,” and so on, with values displayed as numbers ranging between 0 and 1000.
Please contact the plug-in manufacturer to obtain a version which supports this
feature.

68

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Fader Bank Zone
This area of the Logic Control surface contains six buttons.

Bank Left/Right
Moves up or down by “banks” of channels/tracks. To quickly explain, a single Logic
Control is only capable of viewing eight tracks at a time, in either the Global or Mixer
view. To see, and edit or mix more tracks, simply press the Right/Left BANK buttons to
switch between tracks 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, and so on.
The BANK button pair shifts the view section by the number of channels in the control
surface group. As an example; if you have a Logic Control and two Logic Control XT
units, the view shifts by 24 channels.
When shifting by bank, the display is “quantized” to integer banks. As an example:
 your song has 19 tracks.
 Logic Control shows tracks 1 to 8.
 BANK Right shifts to tracks 9 through 16.
 BANK Right shifts to tracks 12 through 19.
 BANK Left shifts back to tracks 9 through 16, not tracks 4 to 11.
This way, you always revert to the bank positions you expect, and are used to.

Channel Left/Right
As per the BANK buttons, but moves up or down in increments of a single channel.

Notes on Fader Bank Editing
When holding down the OPTION button, pressing the BANK Left or CHANNEL Left
button jumps to the first, and pressing the BANK Right or CHANNEL Right button
jumps to the last, tracks in the song. As an example in a 64 track song, tracks 1 through
8 or tracks 57 through 64.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

69

The fader bank offset is independently memorized for Global views where one track
class is displayed (MIDI, Inputs, Audio Tracks, Instruments, Auxes, Busses, Outputs, and
Master). There is also a separate fader bank offset memory location for combinations of
multiple track types. This feature allows you to scroll to audio tracks 2 through 9 in
Global Audio Track view, and then scroll to instruments 5 through 12 in Global
Instruments view. You can switch between these views without losing the fader bank
offset.

Flip
The FLIP button enables/disables the following Flip, Swap, or Zero modes:
 If the LED beside the FLIP button is off, Flip mode is off. The faders control volume.
 Pressing the FLIP button enables Flip mode (the LED is lit): in this mode, the current
assignments of the eight V-Pots are mirrored by the eight channel faders. Pressing
the FLIP button a second time disables Flip mode.
Turning a V-Pot in this mode will also move the corresponding fader.
 Pressing the FLIP button while the SHIFT button is held enables Swap mode (the LED
will flash): in this mode, the encoder assignments are swapped with the fader
assignments. Pressing SHIFT and FLIP again disables Swap mode. As the LCD’s lower
row shows the current value of the encoders, it will display volumes when in this
mode.
 Pressing FLIP without SHIFT held reverts to Flip mode.
 Pressing CONTROL and FLIP switches to Zero mode. Pressing CONTROL and FLIP a
second time disables Zero mode. In this mode, the faders are set to zero and don’t
move. This is useful for acoustic/microphone recordings if Logic Control is located in
the recording booth, and you don’t want to hear/capture any motor noise.
Both Flip and Swap modes work in all view modes.
Flip mode has the following advantages:
 You can edit any type of parameter with a fader, rather than a V-Pot, which allows
more accurate edits.
 You can edit with touch-sensitive faders. The V-Pots are not touch-sensitive, and thus
don’t allow existing (controller automation) movements to be overwritten with a
constant value.

Global View
This button is discussed in “The Global View Zone” on page 74.

70

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Master Fader
Controls the level of the Master fader in the Logic mixers. This reduces the level of all
tracks, but does not affect their relative positions.
When there is no Master Volume Object in the song, Logic Control’s Master fader is
mapped to Output 1-2.
You need to select this Object (Master) in order to set the automation mode of the
Master output. To do so, press the OUTPUTS button and select the master output with
the corresponding SELECT button.
If you use multiple audio systems simultaneously, the MASTER fader only controls the
first device’s Master Volume (in the order shown in the Audio Preferences window).

Display Zone
These buttons affect what you see in the LCD and Position/Time Display.

Name/Value
To switch between the two Display formats—Name or Value—repeatedly press the
NAME/VALUE button in the Logic Control Display section—just below the SMPTE/
BEATS LEDs. For more information, see “Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)” on page 49.

Pressing the NAME/VALUE button while holding the SHIFT button cycles through three
level meter modes:
 Vertical—In this mode, the sixth (last) character of each channel in both LCD rows is
overlaid by a vertical level meter bar. The text character reappears when the level
meter is not visible. The last, rather than the first, character was chosen for the level
meter, as this character is often unused, so no valuable information is “blocked out”
by the level meter.
Note: If you find the flickering D of the dB unit disturbing when levels are displayed,
you should switch off the display of units. See “Control Surface Preferences” on
page 25.
 Horizontal—with Peak Hold. In this mode, the second row is replaced by horizontal
level meter bars. Peak Hold is shown as a hollow box which disappears after three
seconds. Overload (clipping) is displayed as an asterisk. It remains on the LCD until
cleared (see below).
 Off—In this mode, no level meters are displayed in the LCD.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

71

In all three modes, the SIGNAL LEDs function as per usual, indicating the presence of a
signal.
Note: The MIDI bandwidth required for the display of level meters is the same in all
three modes—and is very low. The Position/Time Display updates require much more
MIDI bandwidth than the level meters.
Pressing the NAME/VALUE button, while holding the CONTROL button, clears overload
(clipping) in both the Logic mixers, and the horizontal level meters on the Logic
Control.
Pressing the NAME/VALUE button, while holding the x/ALT button, enters Control
Surface Group Settings mode. This mode enables you to edit several control surface
group settings, some of which are not accessible with a single button:
 V-Pot/V-Select 5 (label “TrkNam”)—sets track name display format
“Name”—track name only
“#:Name”—track number and name
This parameter can also be switched with OPTION and NAME/VALUE.
 V-Pot/V-Select 6 (label “Lock”)—switches Channel Strip view track lock
“Off”—as you are used to: selecting a track also switches the currently edited
Channel Strip track.
“On”—the currently edited Channel Strip Track is not affected by selecting a track.
When you switch from On to Off, this also updates the Channel Strip track.
To edit another track in Locked mode, first disable Lock, then select the desired track,
then re-enable Lock.
 V-Pot/V-Select 7 (label “Disply”)—switches the LCD display format.
“Name”—upper line displays global info, lower line displays parameter names.
“Value”—upper line displays parameter names, lower line displays parameter values.
This parameter can also be switched with NAME/VALUE.
 V-Pot/V-Select 8 (label “Clock”)—switches the Clock display format.
“Beats”—clock is displayed in format bars/measures/beats/ticks.
“SMPTE”—clock is displayed in SMPTE format.
This parameter can also be switched with SMPTE/BEATS.
Control Surface Group Settings mode can be exited by pressing NAME/VALUE, or by
entering one of the Marker or Nudge modes.

SMPTE/Beats
To switch between the two Time formats, repeatedly press the SMPTE/BEATS button in
the Display section at the top of the Logic Control—just below the SMPTE/BEATS LEDs.
For more information, see “Song Position/SMPTE Time Display” on page 49.

72

Chapter 2 Logic Control

The Function Key Zone

The eight Function keys—F1 to F8—are assigned as follows:
 F1 to F7 recalls Screensets 1 to 7.
 F8 closes the top-most window, with “floating” windows closed first.
With the SHIFT key held down, the Function keys open/close particular windows:
 F1—Arrange window
 F2—Track Mixer
 F3—Event Editor
 F4—Score Editor
 F5—Hyper Editor
 F6—Matrix Editor
 F7—Transport window
 F8—Audio window
With the x/ALT key held down, the Function keys trigger common key commands:
 F1—Cut
 F2—Copy
 F3—Paste
 F4—Clear
 F5—Select All
 F6—Select All Following
 F7—Select Similar Objects
 F8—Select Inside Locators
In modal dialogs, the Function keys are equivalent to the computer’s number keys:
 F1—1
 F2—2
 F3—3
 F4—4
 F5—5
 F6—6
 F7—7
 F8—8

Chapter 2 Logic Control

73

The following buttons directly below the Function keys supplement the numeric input
functions:
 MIDI Tracks button—9
 Inputs button—0
In some other “modes,” the Function keys perform other duties, such as shortcuts to
markers. Please see “Marker” on page 79. Also see the tables in “Assignment Overview”
on page 89.

The Global View Zone
The Global view mode is activated by pressing any of the GLOBAL VIEW buttons. When
any is activated, the green LED to the right of the GLOBAL VIEW button will illuminate.

Pressing multiple GLOBAL VIEW buttons simultaneously will display the channels of the
selected classes.
To do so:
m Hold down any GLOBAL VIEW button, and add or remove other Object classes by
pressing the other desired GLOBAL VIEW buttons.
The display order matches the order of these buttons on the front panel of the Logic
Control.
You can select multiple classes by clicking on multiple buttons simultaneously. The
OUTPUTS button activates both Output and Master Objects.
As an example: To see the busses and the outputs, hold down BUSSES, and then press
OUTPUTS.

74

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Function Button Zone
There are three areas in this zone—Modifiers, Automation, and Utilities.

Modifier Buttons

The four buttons in this area are similar to those found on your computer keyboard
(but are independent from the keyboard modifiers). Many Logic functions behave
differently when one or more “modifier” key(s) is pressed, in conjunction with another
key or mouse click. This also applies to the Logic Control. All “modified” Logic Control
commands are covered in each function’s description.
A generic description of each button follows:
 SHIFT—an alternate function/meaning for a button.
 OPTION—the function applies to all objects. For relative value changes: the value is
set to the minimum, default, or maximum value, depending on whether you
increase/decrease it.
 CONTROL—while held down, the Group Clutch is engaged—Track Groups are
temporarily disabled.
 x/ALT—fine tuning/variation of the function.

Automation Buttons

The five buttons in this area activate/deactivate the various automation modes of
Logic. These work in conjunction with the channel SELECT buttons. Simply choose the
channel you wish to automate, select the Automation mode via one of these six
buttons, and move the corresponding fader. The modes are outlined below:

 READ/OFF—Pressing this button repeatedly switches between the Read and Off
automation modes.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

75

Â

Â

Â
Â

 Off—Automation is off. The fader will neither send nor receive automation data.
Existing automation data remains untouched. It will still behave as a fader,
however, and will adjust the volume or pan position and so on as usual.
 Read—The fader will read (follow) any existing automation data, but will not write
data, regardless of any movements you make with the mouse or external control
device.
TOUCH—Writes new parameter changes when the fader is “touched” or V-Pot turned
during playback. Any existing track automation data (of the current fader type) will
be replaced by new movements as long as the control is active—while the fader is
being touched or V-Pot is being turned.
LATCH—Similar to Touch mode, but the control remains activated, even when the
fader is no longer being “touched” or V-Pot being turned. In other words, following
the release of the fader, the current fader value will replace the existing automation
data for as long as the sequencer is in playback mode. Press STOP to finish.
WRITE—Overwrites all existing automation data, or creates new automation data.
Only use it if you wish to destroy all existing automation data.
TRIM—Not currently enabled.

Pressing one of the AUTOMATION buttons while holding the OPTION key assigns the
selected automation mode for all tracks. When an automation mode has been selected
for all tracks, the button’s LED will illuminate whenever the OPTION key is held.

Important: This behavior is slightly different for the “Off” automation mode, when
holding down the OPTION button. While doing so, all automation “writing” buttons will
be turned off, but this does not necessarily mean that all tracks are actually in Off
mode—they could also be in different modes. To ensure that you have set all tracks to
Off mode, press READ/OFF twice (its LED goes on, then off ), while holding down the
OPTION key.

Group

Pressing the GROUP button enters Group Edit mode:
 GROUP button’s LED is on.
 The Assignment display shows the currently displayed group—“G1”, for example.

76

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Â The Time display shows the group name (ten last characters if name is longer than
ten characters).
 The upper LCD line displays track names.
 The lower LCD line displays group parameters.
 Group parameters can be switched with V-Selects.
 Cursor Up/Down selects previous/next group.
 Cursor Left/Right shifts group parameter display.
 SELECT buttons display if a track is a member of the group. Pressing a SELECT button
enables/disables track membership of the group.
With Group Edit mode off, holding down GROUP and pressing one or more SELECT
buttons allows you to create a new group.
Pressing the GROUP button, while the SHIFT button is held down, creates a new group,
opens the Group window and enters Group Edit mode.
Pressing the GROUP button, while the TRACK button is held, switches to Track Multi
Channel view, with the Track Group parameter shown. It displays the group that the
instrument belongs to. Multiple group membership is displayed as in the Track Mixer
window. Turning a V-Pot changes group membership. Note that you can only select
one group (or “Off”) with this function.

Utilities Buttons
The four buttons in this area trigger functions that are often used when working with
Logic.
Save
Saves the current song file. When pressed, a file save dialog will open on your
computer screen, awaiting input of a filename.
The Logic Control LCD will display There is a file select dialog
and the Position/Time Display will show ALERT. All LEDs are unlit.

on the screen

Once the file save has been confirmed—in Logic—the Logic Control will return all
controls to their status prior to use of the Save command.
Once the song has been saved and given a name, you may freely use the SAVE button
to save any subsequent changes. This will occur without the alert messages and file
save dialog appearing onscreen.
As a general working tip, you should always save your Autoload/Template song under a
different name as the first step in any project. If this practice is adhered to, you will be
able to simply press the SAVE button on the Logic Control to incrementally save your
work.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

77

The SAVE LED illuminates as soon as any save-able change has been made in Logic.
Holding down the OPTION button while pressing SAVE opens the “Save As” file selector
box.

Undo
Pressing the UNDO button undoes the last undo-able editing step. As Logic supports
near-unlimited multiple undo/redo, the green UNDO LED does not illuminate to
indicate an undo-able step, but rather to indicate that Redo is available. This serves as a
warning that performing a reversible editing step would render all Redo steps
unavailable.
Holding down the SHIFT button while pressing UNDO performs a “Redo.”
Holding down the OPTION button while pressing UNDO opens the Undo History
window.
Cancel
If an alert is open on-screen, it triggers the Cancel (or Abort) button. More information
on alerts is found in “About Modal Dialogs” on page 45. Pressing the CANCEL button
when no alert is opened will launch the Toolbox at the current on-screen position of
the mouse cursor. Alternately, it will perform any function currently assigned to the
computer keyboard’s Esc key.
If no alert is open, and Logic Control is currently showing the contents of a folder track,
use of the CANCEL button exits the folder.
CANCEL also enables you to invalidate a (blinking) parameter value pre-selection.
Enter
If an alert is open, the ENTER button triggers the default button. See “About Modal
Dialogs” on page 45 for more information.
If no alert is open, and the selected track is a folder track, the ENTER button opens the
folder.

78

Chapter 2 Logic Control

The Transport Zone
This section of the Logic Control features twelve buttons. All are equipped with a
dedicated LED to indicate their current status.

It should be noted that these buttons can be used independently, or in conjunction
with one another, to navigate and edit your songs.
The functionality of these buttons is as follows:

Marker
The MARKER button enables you to jump to, create, and delete markers.
Marker and Nudge mode are mutually exclusive; activating one deactivates the other.
Small Marker Mode
When active, the MARKER button reassigns the behavior of the FAST FWD and REWIND
buttons. These allow you to jump to the next or previous marker.

Deactivation of the MARKER button reverts to the default behavior of the FAST FWD
and REWIND buttons (see “Rewind” on page 85 and “Fast Fwd” on page 85).
Small Marker mode is useful if you want to jump to markers, but wish to continue using
the V-Pots for other purposes.
Large Marker Mode
Pressing the MARKER button while holding down SHIFT shows three “create” options
on the LCD, assigned to the last three V-Selects. Once markers have been created:

Chapter 2 Logic Control

79

Â V-Select 1 to 5—displays the first five markers by name. Pressing a V-Select moves
the SPL to this Marker. When the current song position (indicated by the SPL) is
inside a marker, the lower line displays INSIDE, and the V-Pot LED ring is lit.
 V-Select 6—Cr w/o—Creates a marker without rounding to the nearest bar.
 V-Select 7—Create—Creates a marker rounded to the nearest bar.
 V-Select 8—Delete—Deletes the marker above the current SPL location.
To create or delete a marker at the current song position, simply press the appropriate
V-Select switch.
The creation or deletion of markers is best used in conjunction with the Jog/Scrub
Wheel. Simply move to the desired song position by dialing with the wheel, and then
press the appropriate V-Pot.
 For coarse placement, simply use the wheel to move the SPL.
 For fine placement, press the SCRUB button, then use the wheel to precisely position
the SPL. (Only appropriate if creating or deleting an un-rounded marker).
For more information on the Jog/Scrub Wheel, please refer to “The Jog/Scrub Wheel
Zone” on page 88.
Large Marker mode is terminated by pressing MARKER.
Temporary Marker Mode
If you want to enter Marker mode temporarily (to quickly perform a few marker
functions), hold down the Marker button and press one (or more) of the V-Selects: this
will execute the marker function and leave marker mode as soon as you release the
MARKER button.
 When in this mode—with the MARKER button held—pressing the Function keys
F1—F8 “jumps” to the first eight markers (if created). As an example, to navigate to
marker 3, press-hold MARKER and press F3.
 To jump between markers, with (or without) the MARKER button held, simply press
the FAST FWD or REWIND buttons.

80

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Nudge
The NUDGE button enables you to move (nudge) selected Audio or MIDI Regions, or
events.
Marker and Nudge mode are mutually exclusive; activating one deactivates the other.
Small Nudge Mode
Use of the NUDGE button reassigns the behavior of the FAST FWD and REWIND
buttons. They nudge the selected Regions or events by the value defined in Large
Nudge mode (see below).

Pressing the NUDGE button again reverts to the default behavior of the FAST FWD and
REWIND buttons (see “Rewind” on page 85 and “Fast Fwd” on page 85).
Small Nudge mode is useful if you want to nudge Regions or events, but still use the VPots for other purposes.
Large Nudge Mode
Pressing the Nudge button while holding down Shift updates the LCD to display eight
options, assigned to the V-Pots and V-Selects. All functions allow you to move the
selected Region or events.

As an indicator, the position of the first selected Region or event is displayed above VPots 3 and 4. If nothing is displayed, either; a window that does not allow selection of
Regions or events is open, or no Regions or events are selected.
The functions are as follows:
 V-Pot 1—Nudge—selects the nudge value used by the REWIND and F.FWD buttons.
These buttons move the selected object(s) backwards/forwards by the defined value.
 V-Select 2—Pickup—moves to the current SPL location.
 V-Pot 3—Bar— moves by one bar.
 V-Pot 4—Beat—moves by the current song denominator value (beats).
 V-Pot 5—Format—moves by the current song format value (sub-divisions—1/16th
and so on).
 V-Pot 6—Ticks—moves by single ticks.
 V-Pot 7—Frames—moves by one SMPTE frame.
 V-Pot 8—Fram/2—moves by half a SMPTE frame.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

81

Â The cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard’s cursor keys, allowing easy
selection of a Region or event.
Large Nudge mode is terminated by pressing NUDGE.
Temporary Nudge Mode
If you want to use Nudge temporarily (for one or two small moves), hold down the
NUDGE key, and use one or more of the V-Pots: this will execute the selected function
and exit Temporary Nudge mode as soon as you release the NUDGE button.
In Temporary Nudge mode, the cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard’s
cursor keys, allowing easy selection of a Region or event.
The Nudge value for the REWIND and F.FWD buttons can also be defined with the
function buttons:
 F1—sets Ticks.
 F2—sets Format.
 F3—sets Beat.
 F4—sets Bar.
 F5—sets Frames.
 F6—sets Frames/2.

Cycle
Activates/deactivates Cycle mode. By default, the cycle area will fall between the first
two markers.

Subsequent markers can act as left/right boundaries for further cycle areas.
To “jump” between Cycle areas—defined by the markers:
1 Press the MARKER button.
2 Press the CYCLE button, and when active, press the REWIND or FAST FWD buttons.
To set the left or right locator to the current song position:
m Hold down CYCLE and press REWIND or FAST FWD. This also enables Cycle.
The fastest way to define a new cycle area is to:
1 Navigate to the left locator with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
2 Press CYCLE and REWIND.
3 Navigate to the right locator with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
4 Press CYCLE and FAST FWD.

82

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Cycle View
Pressing the SHIFT and CYCLE buttons activates Cycle view mode:
 The mode display displays Cy
 V-Pot/V-Select 1—shows and edits the current Cycle status (off or on); you can also
use the CYCLE button.
 V-Select 2—BySel— sets the current Cycle area by the selection made in the Arrange
window (selected Audio or MIDI Region).
 V-Pot 3—Move— moves the current Cycle by a bar with each “click” when turning
the V-Pot
 The display shows the left and right locators above V-Pots 5 and 7.
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â

Pressing V-Select 5 picks up the current song position for the left locator.
Turning V-Pot 5 changes the left locator in bars.
Turning V-Pot 6 changes the left locator in beats (denominator steps).
Pressing V-Select 7 picks up the current song position for the right locator.
Turning V-Pot 7 changes the right locator in bars.
Turning V-Pot 8 changes the right locator in beats (denominator steps).

To return to a regular Assignment mode, press one of the Assignment buttons.

Drop
Activates/deactivates Drop-In mode.

To navigate between drop-in areas:
1 Press the MARKER button.
2 Press the DROP button, and when active, press the FAST FWD or REWIND buttons.
To set the Drop In or Drop Out locator to the current song position:
m Hold down DROP and press FAST FWD or REWIND. This also enables Drop.
The fastest way to define a new Drop In area is to:
1 Navigate to the Drop In locator with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
2 Press DROP and REWIND.
3 Navigate to the Drop Out locator with the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
4 Press DROP and FAST FWD.
Drop View
Pressing the SHIFT and DROP buttons activates Drop view:

Chapter 2 Logic Control

83

Â The mode display shows dr
 V-Pot/V-Select 1 shows and edits the current Drop status (off or on); you can also use
the DROP button.
 V-Pot 3—Move— moves the current Drop region by a bar with each “click” when
turning the V-Pot.
 The display shows the Drop In and Drop Out locators above V-Pots 5 and 7.
 Pressing V-Select 5 picks up the current song position for the Drop In locator.
 Turning V-Pot 5 changes the Drop In locator in bars.
 Turning V-Pot 6 changes the left locator in beats (denominator steps).
 Pressing V-Select 7 picks up the current song position for the Drop Out locator.
 Turning V-Pot 7 changes the Drop Out locator in bars.
 Turning V-Pot 8 changes the right locator in beats (denominator steps).
Changing a drop locator with the Logic Control enables Drop mode.
To return to a regular Assignment mode, press one of the Assignment buttons.

Replace
Activates/deactivates Replace mode.

Click
Enables/Disables MIDI (or Klopfgeist) metronome click. There are independent click
settings for play and record. The click settings are enabled or disabled, dependent on
the current Record state (see the “MIDI/Monitor Metronome Click” key command).

Pressing SHIFT and CLICK buttons activates/deactivates both External Sync mode and
Transmit MMC.

Solo
The SOLO button behaves as per the Solo key command. Individual channels can be
soloed via the channel SOLO buttons on each channel strip. MIDI or Audio Regions can
be selected and soloed along with the selected channels. Each channel features an
independent SOLO LED which is lit when a track is soloed. The RUDE SOLO LED—just
to the right of the Position/Time Display—is lit whenever any track is soloed.
Pressing the SHIFT and SOLO buttons enables Solo Lock mode.

84

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Rewind
Rewinds/shuttles through the song. If pressed repeatedly while rewinding, the rewind
speed is accelerated. If the FAST FWD button is pressed while REWIND is engaged, the
fast rewind will be slowed. Repeated presses of the FAST FWD button will slow down,
stop, and eventually reverse the shuttle direction. Pressing the STOP button will halt
the rewind. Using the Jog/Scrub Wheel will also exit shuttle mode.

When one of the Marker modes is activated, repeated presses of the REWIND button
will move the Song Position Line (SPL) to the previous marker.
When one of the Nudge modes is activated, the REWIND button will move the selected
Region(s) or event(s) backward by the value defined in Large Nudge mode.

Fast Fwd
Fast forwards/shuttles through the song. If pressed repeatedly while fast forwarding,
the shuttle speed is accelerated. If the REWIND button is pressed while FAST FWD is
engaged, the fast forward will be slowed. Repeated presses of the REWIND button will
slow down, stop, and eventually reverse the shuttle direction. Pressing the STOP button
will halt the fast forward. Using the Jog/Scrub Wheel will also exit shuttle mode.

When one of the Marker modes is activated, repeated presses of the FAST FWD button
will move the Song Position Line to the next marker.
When one of the Nudge modes is activated, the FAST FWD button will move the
selected Region(s) or event(s) forward by the value defined in Large Nudge mode.
As a tip, you can combine markers with Cycle areas by pressing the respective buttons
on the Logic Control. This, in conjunction with navigation between markers (using the
REWIND and FAST FWD buttons), will move the SPL and automatically set a cycle area
between adjacent markers. Try this, and other options, with various button
combinations.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

85

Stop
Stops all other Transport functions. Pressing the STOP button a second time will return
to the song start point, or the beginning of the nearest cycle area, if Cycle is active.
Repeated presses will switch between the two.

Play
Plays from the current song position. If pressed repeatedly, it will jump to the
beginning of the nearest cycle area, if Cycle is active.

SHIFT and PLAY works as a Pause command.

Record
Activates recording on the selected MIDI, audio, or Audio Instrument track.

A special note for audio tracks if you have not “Saved as Project”: When the first audio
track is armed by pressing the REC/RDY button on the desired channel, a file save
dialog will open on your computer screen, awaiting entry of a filename. The Logic
Control LCD display shows There is a file select dialog on the screen and the
Position/Time Display will show ALERT. All LEDs will go off.
Once the file name has been entered—in Logic—the Logic Control will return all
controls to their prior status.
Once the “default” audio file name has been entered, you may freely select and arm any
Audio track, and then press the RECORD button. This will happen without the alert
messages and file save dialog appearing onscreen.
As a general working tip, you should save your Autoload/Template song as a project
immediately. This will avoid the need to define filenames, and makes handling faster
and easier—particularly when “driving” Logic with the Logic Control.

86

Chapter 2 Logic Control

The Cursor/Zoom Key Zone
This collection of five buttons serves a number of purposes.

Normal Operation
When the ZOOM button’s LED is off, these buttons select the current parameter, shift
the current parameter page or Send/EQ/Insert slot, depending on the current V-Pot
assignment.

When holding down the OPTION button, the Cursor Left/Right buttons scroll to the
first/last page, and the Cursor Up/Down buttons scroll to the first/last slot.
When holding down the x/Alt button, the Cursor Left/Right buttons shift the
parameter display by one parameter, rather than one page.
In view modes which don’t require page or slot shifts, they emulate the computer
keyboard’s cursor keys. Example: Track Multi Channel view.
In Large and Temporary Nudge mode, the Cursor Left/Right buttons emulate the
computer keyboard’s cursor keys, allowing easy Region or event selection.

Zoom Mode
Pressing the ZOOM button enables Zoom mode. The cursor buttons are then used to
change the vertical or horizontal zoom factor of the active window.

In the Arrange window:
 OPTION and Cursor Up/Down changes the zoom factor of the selected track.
 OPTION and Cursor Left resets the zoom factor of the selected track.
 OPTION and Cursor Right resets the zoom factor of all tracks of the same class (audio,
MIDI, and so on) as the selected track.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

87

Computer Cursor Key Emulation
To use the cursor buttons as a replacement for the computer keyboard cursor keys,
hold down the SHIFT key.
By pressing SHIFT and ZOOM, the cursor buttons go to Permanent Cursor Key mode—
they mimic the computer cursor keys without the need to hold down SHIFT. The ZOOM
button LED flashes when in this mode.
You can deactivate this mode by pressing the ZOOM button.

The Jog/Scrub Wheel Zone
The Jog/Scrub Wheel and SCRUB button can be used to navigate through the song,
which is useful for a number of Transport tasks. Simply turn the dial to use it. The
following Scrub modes change the behavior of the Jog/Scrub Wheel.
 Scrub mode off: the Jog/Scrub Wheel moves the SPL.
 Scrub mode on: the Jog/Scrub Wheel performs “scrubbing,” which allows you to
hear the data of the selected track while scrolling/moving through the song.
Audio tracks are normally played back at their original speed. If you would prefer to
hear them at double speed, choose Preferences > Audio > Drivers, and set Maximum
Scrub Speed to Double in the pull-down menu.
Note: You can also use the SCRUB button for Pause functionality.
 SHUTTLE mode (Scrub button LED flashing): the Jog/Scrub Wheel shuttles the SPL—
turning it increases or decreases the speed of SPL movement.

88

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Assignment Overview
The following assignment tables are broken down into “zones” of the Logic Control.

Channel Strip (x8)
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

V-Pot

—

Modify parameter displayed in LCD.

OPTION

Set parameter to minimum, default, or maximum value.

x/ALT

Modify parameter at high resolution.

—

Set parameter displayed on LCD to default value, or: Switch between
two possible values.

V-Select

Flashing pre-selection:
—

Enter the pre-selected value.

Menu options:
—

Enter whatever option is visible in display.

If track is folder:
REC/RDY
SOLO

—

Enter folder.

—

Activate/Deactivate Record Enable button of track.

OPTION

Disable Record Enable button for all tracks.

—

Activate/Deactivate Solo button of track’s Audio Object.

OPTION

Disable Solo button for all Audio Objects.

In Send Destination/Level Multi Channel view:
—

Switch pre/post status of selected send.

In Send Destination/Level Channel Strip view:
—

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Switch between pre/post of send on selected track.

89

Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

MUTE

—

Activate/Deactivate Mute button of track’s Audio Object.

OPTION

Disable Mute button for all Audio Objects.

In Track Multi Channel view:
SHIFT

Activate/Deactivate mute/bypass of the shown parameter.

In EQ Multi Channel view:
SHIFT

Activate/Deactivate bypass of the current EQ band.

In EQ Frequency/Gain view:
—

Activate/Deactivate bypass of selected EQ band.

In Send Multi Channel view:
SHIFT

Activate/Deactivate bypass of selected send.

In Send Destination/Level Multi Channel view:
—

Activate/Deactivate bypass of selected send.

In Send Destination/Level Channel Strip view:
—

Activate/Deactivate mute of send on selected track.

In Plug-in Multi Channel view:
SHIFT

Activate/Deactivate bypass of plug-in.

In Instrument Multi Channel view:
SELECT

90

SHIFT

Activate/Deactivate bypass of instrument.

—

Select track.

SHIFT

Set track volume to unity level (0 dB).

OPTION

Creates a new track with the same instrument as the selected track
and switches to Arrange view.

SHIFT+
OPTION

Create a new track with the next instrument (following the selected
track) and switches to Arrange view.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

FADER

—

Adjust volume.

In Flip mode “Duplicate”:
—

Same function as V-Pot of same channel.

In Flip mode “Swap”:
—

Swap function with V-Pot of same channel.

In Surround Angle/Diversity view:
—

Adjust surround diversity.

In EQ Frequency/Gain view:
—

Adjust gain of selected EQ band.

In Send Destination/Level Multi Channel view:
—

Adjust send level of selected send.

In Send Destination/Level Channel Strip view:
—

Adjust send level of send on selected track.

ASSIGNMENT Section
Hold down to show soft-button menu; release to switch V-Pots to Multi Channel or
Channel Strip views for:
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

TRACK

—

Track parameters

PAN/SURROUND

—

Pan/Surround parameters

EQ

—

EQ parameters

SEND

—

Send parameters

PLUG-IN

—

Plug-in selection or Plug-in Edit mode

INSTRUMENT

—

Instrument selection or Instrument Edit mode

BANK <>
CHANNEL<>
FLIP

—

Shift fader bank left/right by number of channel strips.

OPTION

Shift fader bank to beginning or end.

—

Shift fader bank left/right by one channel.

OPTION

Shift fader bank to beginning or end.

—

Switch Flip mode between Off and Duplicate.

SHIFT

Switch Flip mode between Off and Swap.

CONTROL Switch Flip mode between Off and Zero (turns fader motors off ).
GLOBAL VIEW

—

Switch between Mixer view and Global view.

SHIFT

Switch between Mixer view and Arrange view.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

91

DISPLAY Parameters
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

NAME/VALUE

—

Switch between parameter name and parameter value display.

SHIFT

Cycle through level meter displays: vertical, horizontal, and off.

OPTION

Switch between track name and track number:name display.

CONTROL Clear clip/overload flags.
SMPTE/BEATS

x/ALT

Enter control surface group settings mode.

—

Switch between SMPTE and beat format in clock display.

Function Buttons
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

F1

—

Recall Screenset 1.

SHIFT

Open/Close Arrange window.

x/ALT

Cut

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Volume.

PAN/
Switch to Multi Channel view—Pan/surround angle.
SURROUND
EQ

Switch to Multi Channel view—Bypass.

SEND

Switch to Multi Channel view—Destination.

MARKER

Create marker without rounding.

NUDGE

Nudge value: Tick

In modal dialog:
F2

F1 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 1 key.
—

Recall Screenset 2.

SHIFT

Open/Close Track Mixer window.

x/ALT

Copy

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Pan.

PAN/
Switch to Multi Channel view—Pan/surround radius.
SURROUND
EQ

Switch to Multi Channel view—EQ Type.

SEND

Switch to Multi Channel view—Level.

MARKER

Create marker with rounding.

NUDGE

Nudge value: Format

In modal dialog:

92

Chapter 2 Logic Control

F2 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 2 key.

Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

F3

—

Recall Screenset 3.

SHIFT

Open/Close Event Editor.

x/ALT

Paste

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Track mode.

PAN/
Switch to Multi Channel view—Pan/surround LFE.
SURROUND
EQ

Switch to Multi Channel view—Frequency.

SEND

Switch to Multi Channel view—Position.

MARKER

Delete marker.

NUDGE

Nudge value: Beat

In modal dialog:
F4

F3 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 3 key.
—

Recall Screenset 4.

SHIFT

Open/Close Score Editor.

x/ALT

Clear

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Input.

PAN/
Switch to Multi Channel view—Pan/surround mode.
SURROUND
EQ
SEND

Switch to Multi Channel view—Mute.

NUDGE

Nudge value: Bar

In modal dialog:
F5

Switch to Multi Channel view—Gain.

F4 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 4 key.
—

Recall Screenset 5.

SHIFT

Open/Close Hyper Editor.

x/ALT

Select All.

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Output.

PAN/
Switch to Channel Strip view.
SURROUND
EQ

Switch to Multi Channel view—Q Factor.

SEND

Switch to Channel Strip view.

NUDGE

Nudge value: Frame

In modal dialog:

Chapter 2 Logic Control

F5 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 5 key.

93

Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

F6

—

Recall Screenset 6.

SHIFT

Open/Close Matrix Editor.

x/ALT

Select All Following

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Automation.

PAN/
Switch to Angle/Diversity view.
SURROUND
EQ
SEND

Switch to Channel Strip 2 view.

NUDGE

Nudge value: 1/2 Frame

In modal dialog:
F7

Switch to Channel Strip view.

F6 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 6 key.
—

Recall Screenset 7.

SHIFT

Open/Close Transport window.

x/ALT

Select Similar Regions/events.

TRACK

Switch to Multi Channel view—Displayed Parameter

PAN/
Switch to Surround X/Y view.
SURROUND
EQ

Switch to Frequency/Gain Multi Channel view.

SEND

Switch to Destination/Level Multi Channel view.

In modal dialog:
F8

F7 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 7 key.
—

Close top-most floating window.

SHIFT

Open/Close Audio window.

x/ALT

Select Inside Locators.

TRACK

Switch to Track Setup view.

EQ

Switch to Frequency/Gain Channel Strip view.

SEND

Switch to Destination/Level Channel Strip view.

In modal dialog:

94

Chapter 2 Logic Control

F8 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 8 key.

GLOBAL VIEW Buttons
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

MIDI TRACKS

—

Switch to Global view and show MIDI tracks.

SHIFT

Set to fader bank no. 1 (tracks 1 to 8, for example).

In modal dialog:
INPUTS

MIDI TRACKS button is equivalent to computer keyboard 9 key.
—
SHIFT

In modal dialog:
AUDIO TRACKS

—

Switch to Global view and show Audio Track Objects.

SHIFT

Set to fader bank no. 3 (tracks 17 to 24, for example).
AUDIO TRACKS button is equivalent to computer keyboard’s period
key.

—

Switch to Global view and show Audio Instrument Objects.

SHIFT

Set to fader bank no. 4 (tracks 25 to 32, for example).

In modal dialog:
AUX

AUDIO INSTRUMENTS button is equivalent to computer keyboard /
key.
—
SHIFT

In modal dialog:
BUSSES

Set to fader bank no. 5 (tracks 33 to 40, for example).

—

Switch to Global view and show Bus Objects.

SHIFT

Set to fader bank no. 6 (tracks 41 to 48, for example).
BUSSES button is equivalent to computer keyboard – key.

—

Switch to Global view and show Outputs and Master Objects.

SHIFT

Set to fader bank no. 7 (tracks 49 to 56, for example).

In modal dialog:
USER

Switch to Global view and show Aux Objects.
AUX button is equivalent to computer keyboard * key.

In modal dialog:
OUTPUTS

Set to fader bank no. 2 (tracks 9 to 16, for example).
INPUTS button is equivalent to computer keyboard 0 key.

In modal dialog:
AUDIO
INSTRUMENTS

Switch to Global view and show Audio Input Objects.

OUTPUTS button is equivalent to computer keyboard + key.
—

Currently unassigned.

SHIFT

Set to fader bank no. 8 (tracks 57 to 64, for example).

MODIFIERS—While Held Down:
Logic Control

Function/Comments

SHIFT

Switch to second function.

OPTION

Apply function to all tracks or set parameter to minimum, default, or maximum
value.

CONTROL

Disable Group functions while held down.

x/ALT

Enable fine mode; shift parameter page by one parameter instead of page.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

95

AUTOMATION Buttons
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

READ/OFF

—

Set selected track’s automation to Read or Off.

OPTION

Set all tracks’ automation to Read or Off.

—

Set selected track’s automation to Touch.

OPTION

Set all tracks’ automation to Touch.

TOUCH
LATCH
WRITE

—

Set selected track’s automation to Latch.

OPTION

Set all tracks’ automation to Latch.

—

Set selected track’s automation to Write.

OPTION

Set all tracks’ automation to Write.

—

Enter Group Edit mode.

SHIFT

Create a new group, open the Group window and enter Group Edit
mode.

TRACK

Switch to Track Multi Channel view, displaying Track Group parameter.

TRIM
GROUP

Currently unassigned.

UTILITIES Buttons
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

SAVE

—

Save Song.

UNDO

CANCEL

OPTION

Save Song as.

—

Undo

SHIFT

Redo

OPTION

Open Undo History.

—

Leave folder.

Flashing pre-selection:
—

Cancel pre-selection.

In alerts:
ENTER

—

Execute Cancel button.

—

Enter folder of selected track.

In alerts:
—

96

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Execute default button.

TRANSPORT Buttons
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

MARKER

—

Switch Small Marker mode on/off.

SHIFT

Switch Large Marker mode on/off.

—

Switch Small Nudge mode on/off.

SHIFT

Switch Large Nudge mode on/off.

MARKER

Create a marker. This allows you to create a marker with one hand
without entering Large Marker mode.

—

Activate/Deactivate Cycle.

SHIFT

Switch to Cycle view.

—

Activate/Deactivate Drop.

SHIFT

Switch to Drop view.

REPLACE

—

Activate/Deactivate Replace.

CLICK

—

Activate/Deactivate metronome click (separately for playback and
record).

SHIFT

Activate/Deactivate internal/external sync and MMC.

—

Activate/Deactivate Solo Lock function.

SHIFT

Enable Solo Lock function.

—

Shuttle rewind.

MARKER

Go to previous marker.

NUDGE

Nudge left by chosen value.

NUDGE

CYCLE
DROP

SOLO
REWIND <<

CYCLE

Engage Cycle function and set left locator to SPL.

DROP

Engage Drop and set Drop In to SPL.

In Marker mode:
—

Go to previous marker.

In Nudge mode:
F.FWD >>

—

Nudge left by chosen value.

—

Shuttle forward.

MARKER

Go to next marker.

NUDGE

Nudge right by chosen value.

CYCLE

Engage Cycle function and set right locator to SPL.

DROP

Engage Drop and set Drop Out to SPL.

In Marker mode:
—

Go to previous marker.

In Nudge mode:
STOP

—

Nudge right by chosen value.

—

Stop.

Chapter 2 Logic Control

97

Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

PLAY

—

Play

SHIFT

Pause

—

Record

RECORD

Cursor Keys and Scrub Wheel
Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

Cursor Left/Right If in Multi Channel view:
—

Select previous/next parameter of current view.

ZOOM

Scroll window horizontally by page.

If in Channel Strip EQ, Send view or Plug-in/Instrument Edit view:
—

Shift current editor page by one page.

x/ALT

Shift current editor page by one parameter.

ZOOM

Scroll window horizontally by page.

Otherwise (always in Nudge mode):
—

Mimic computer keyboard Left/Right Arrow keys.

ZOOM

Scroll window horizontally by page.

In Zoom mode:
—

Change horizontal zoom level.

SHIFT

Reset individual track zoom of current track (Cursor Left) or all tracks of
same class (Cursor Right).

Cursor Up/Down In Channel Strip EQ, Send view or Plug-In/Instrument Editor view:
—

Select previous/next EQ band, Send, or Insert slot.

ZOOM

Scroll window vertically by page.

Otherwise (always in Nudge mode):
—

Mimic computer keyboard Up/Down Arrow keys.

ZOOM

Scroll window vertically by page.

In Zoom mode:

ZOOM

SCRUB

98

—

Change vertical zoom level.

SHIFT

Change individual track zoom of current track.

—

Switch between default cursor button behavior (see above) and Zoom
mode.

SHIFT

Switch between default cursor button behavior and permanently
mimicking computer keyboard arrow keys.

—

Activate/Deactivate Scrub mode.

SHIFT

Enable Shuttle mode on the Jog Wheel (SCRUB button LED flashes)

Chapter 2 Logic Control

Logic Control

Modifier

Function/Comments

Jog Wheel

—

Move song position line.

CYCLE

Set the Left locator to the current SPL, advance the SPL as normally,
then set the Right locator to the SPL. Further Jog Wheel turns while
still holding down CYCLE advances the SPL and sets the Right locator
again. Tip: Rotating the Jog Wheel counterclockwise while holding
down CYCLE defines a skip-cycle range.

DROP

Set the Drop In locator to the current SPL, advance the SPL as
normally, then set the Drop Out locator to the SPL. Further Jog Wheel
turns while still holding down DROP advances the SPL and sets the
Drop out locator again.

In Scrub mode (SCRUB button LED on):
—

Scrub

In Shuttle mode (SCRUB button LED flashing):
—

Shuttle

External Inputs
Logic Control

Modifier

Function

USER SWITCH A

—

Play/Stop

USER SWITCH B

—

Drop In/Out

EXTERNAL
CONTROL

—

Master Volume

Chapter 2 Logic Control

99

3

M-Audio iControl

3

This chapter will introduce you to using Logic Pro with the MAudio iControl.
The iControl support in Logic Pro has been designed to ensure full GarageBand
compatibility. When a GarageBand song is imported into Logic, the iControl can be
used to edit the song in exactly the same fashion as it would in GarageBand.
Logic, however, offers many more functions than GarageBand, leading to some iControl
buttons not being assigned as you might expect in Logic. But don’t worry: you can
easily reassign these buttons using the sophisticated Control Surfaces Assignments
Editor of Logic (see the Control Surface chapter for more information).
To use Logic with an iControl unit, you need:
 an iControl unit
 Logic Pro 7. 2, or later
 a free USB port

Setting Up the iControl
Setting up your iControl for use with Logic is a simple process: Connect the iControl to
any of your computer’s USB ports.
Logic automatically detects a connected iControl. You can use the iControl in an
independent control surface group (with other control surface icons placed above/
below the iControl icon), or combined into one control surface group with one or more
control surfaces.
If Cycle mode is enabled in your song or any tracks are muted, the corresponding LEDs
will be illuminated, reflecting each track’s current status.
The following sections will provide you with information on accessing parameters and
functions that may not be apparent at first glance. You are strongly encouraged to
experiment with these parameters and functions—this will help to familiarize you with
iControl support in Logic.

101

Compatibility
The iControl can edit all plug-ins that offer parameters which can be automated.
Many Logic plug-ins—effects and Audio Instruments—plus those of third-party
manufacturers, feature dozens of parameters. Every one of these parameters can be
accessed by the iControl.
To give you an example of how this works, imagine a plug-in that contains, say, 16
parameters.
Once you’ve switched to the appropriate Channel Strip View of the plug-in you wish to
adjust, you can directly affect parameters 1 to 8 with encoders 1 to 8. You can then
switch by a “page” to access parameters 9 to 16.
Simply press the Arrow Up or Arrow Down button to step up/down to the next “page”
of parameters.
Should you find that your third-party plug-in does not support remote editing or other
features mentioned in this document, please contact the plug-in manufacturer to
obtain an updated version that supports these facilities.

Channel Views
The channels section (the eight channel strips on the right side of your iControl; each
channel strip comprises of a Select, Record Enable, Mute, and Solo button plus a rotary
encoder) operates in two view “modes”—Multi Channel and Channel Strip View.
Switching between these modes only affects the rotary encoders, with the other
channel controls always remaining in Multi Channel View.
 Multi Channel View—accesses one parameter for eight tracks, such as pan or volume
(normally a section of the Track Mixer window).
 Channel Strip View—accesses eight parameters of the selected track.
Switching to a Multi Channel or Channel Strip view is achieved by pressing one of the
Assignment buttons (see the following section).

The Assignment Buttons
The two button areas labelled “All Tracks” and “Selected Track” are used to define the
behavior of the channel strip buttons.
Volume
Pressing the Volume button enters Volume Multi Channel View; you can use the rotary
encoders to control the Volume fader of the eight active tracks in this mode.

102

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

The other channel strip buttons maintain the default Multi Channel View function:
 Sel buttons: Selects the track for editing.
 Record Enable buttons: Enables/disables the track for recording.
 Mute button: Activates/deactivates the Mute button of the Audio Object that
corresponds with the track.
 Solo button: Activate/deactivates the Solo button of the Audio Object that
corresponds with the track.
Pan
Pressing the Pan button enters Pan Multi Channel View; you can use the rotary
encoders to control the Pan knob of the eight active tracks in this mode.
The other channel strip buttons maintain the default Multi Channel view function:
 Sel buttons: Selects the track for editing.
 Record Enable buttons: Enables/disables the track for recording.
 Mute button: Activates/deactivates the Mute button of the Audio Object that
corresponds with the track.
 Solo button: Activate/deactivates the Solo button of the Audio Object that
corresponds with the track.
Track Info
Pressing the Track Info button enters Track Channel Strip View. In this mode, you can
use the Sel buttons and rotary encoders of the eight channel strips to edit global
parameters of the selected track. The Record Enable, Mute, and Solo buttons maintain
their default Multi Channel view functions.
 Sel button 1 to 5: Switches the bypass status of the first five Insert slots.
 Sel button 6 and 7: Switches the bypass status of the first and second Send slots.
Note: A Select button is illuminated if the Insert or Send slot is enabled, and unlit if the
effect is bypassed.
 Sel button 8: Not assigned.
 Encoder 1: In GarageBand, every Real Instrument track (Real Instrument tracks are
audio tracks in Logic) contains a Noise Gate plug-in. Given this default plug-in
assignment, encoder 1 is assigned to controlling the Threshold parameter of the
Noise Gate in Track Channel Strip mode (if inserted in the selected channel strip).
 Encoder 2: In GarageBand songs, every Real Instrument track contains a Compressor
plug-in. Again, in Track Channel Strip mode, encoder 2 is assigned to controlling the
Compressor’s Ratio (if inserted in the selected channel strip).
 Encoders 3 and 4 are not assigned.
 Encoder 5 controls the Pan knob of the channel.
 Encoder 6 controls the Send level of the first Send.

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

103

Â Encoder 7 controls the Send level of the second Send.
 Encoder 8 controls the Volume fader of the channel.
Generator
Pressing the Generator button allows you to edit all sound generation parameters of
the software instrument for the selected track. The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons
switch to the previous or next eight parameters.
Note: This mode can only be accessed if the selected channel strip contains an audio
instrument.
Effect 1 and Effect 2
Pressing Effect 1 or Effect 2 allows you to edit the parameters of the third or fourth
Insert slot of the selected track (where applicable).
 Turning the encoders changes the parameter value.
 The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons switch to the previous or next parameter
page.
Note: When shifting by a “page,” this always “quantizes” to integer pages. As an
example: The plug-in has 19 parameters and the iControl displays parameters 1 to 8.
 Pressing the Arrow Down button shifts to parameters 9 to 16.
 Pressing the Arrow Down button again shifts to parameters 12 to 19
 Pressing the Arrow Up button shifts back to parameters 9 to 16, not 4 to 11.
This way, you always revert to the page positions you expect to find, and are
comfortable with.
Pressing the Effect 1 or Effect 2 button while pressing the Option button switches the
bypass status of Insert slots 3 and 4, respectively.
EQ
Pressing the EQ button allows you to edit all EQ parameters—in all bands—for the
selected track.
Pressing the EQ button opens or closes the Channel EQ plug-in window of the track. If
no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected track, a Channel EQ will be
inserted automatically when the EQ Channel Strip View is entered.
Note: You can use the Arrow Down and Up buttons to switch to the next or previous
parameter page.

104

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

Arrow Up and Arrow Down Buttons
The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons move up or down by “banks” of tracks (or
between “pages” of parameters, as discussed earlier). To quickly explain, a single
iControl device is only capable of viewing eight tracks at a time. To see, and edit or mix
more tracks, simply press the Arrow Up or Arrow Down button to switch between
tracks 1 to 8, 9 to 16, 17 to 24 and so on.
Note that when shifting by bank, this always “quantizes” to integer banks. As an
example: Your song has 19 tracks, and the iControl is displaying tracks 1 to 8.
 Pressing the Arrow Down button shifts to tracks 9 to 16
 Pressing the Arrow Down button again shifts to tracks 12 to 19
 Pressing the Arrow Up button shifts back to tracks 9 to 16, not 4 to 11
This way, you always revert to the bank positions you expect, and are used to.
Note: Pressing the Arrow Up button while holding down the Option button jumps to
the first tracks, and pressing the Arrow Down button jumps to the last tracks in the
song—as an example (in a 64 track song), tracks 1 to 8 or tracks 57 to 64.
If the Generator, EQ, Effect 1, or Effect 2 button is illuminated, the Arrow Up and Arrow
Down buttons have different functionality. See the sections above for details.

The Channel Strip(s)
As each channel strip is identical, the information discussed in this section applies
equally to all eight of the iControl channel strips.

Select Button
This button is used to select a channel for channel-based editing or assignment
commands. Each channel features an independent Select LED which is lit when a track
is selected.
Note: If the Track Info button is illuminated, the Select buttons behave differently. See
“Track Info” on page 103 for details.

Record Enable Button
This button arms or disables the channel for recording. Each channel features an
independent Record Button LED which illuminates when a track is “armed” for
recording.
Note: Holding down the Option button, while pressing any Record Enable button will
disarm all tracks.

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

105

Mute Button
Used to mute the track’s signal. Each channel features an independent Mute LED which
illuminates when a track is muted.
Note: Holding down the Option button, while pressing any Mute button will unmute
all tracks.

Solo Button
Used to solo channel signals. Each channel features an independent Solo LED which
illuminates when a track is soloed.
Note: Holding down the Option button, while pressing any Solo button will disable
solo for all tracks.

Encoder
The eight encoders are used for a number of operations, depending on the current
status of the Assignment buttons to the left. See “The Assignment Buttons” on
page 102.
Note: Pressing the Option button while turning an encoder sets the Relative Controller
mode to Full: The encoder switches between the parameter’s minimum, default, or
maximum value.

The Jog Wheel
The Jog Wheel can be used to navigate through the song, which is useful for a number
of transport tasks. Simply turn the dial to move to a song position.

The Transport Zone
This section of the iControl features six buttons.
It should be noted that these buttons can be used independently, or in conjunction
with one another, to navigate and edit your songs.

Record Button
Activates recording on the selected track.

Return to Zero Button (RTZ)
Moves the SPL to the beginning of the song.

106

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

Rewind Button
Holding the Rewind button moves the song position line backwards. Quickly pressing
the Rewind button once, moves the SPL one bar backwards. Pressing the Rewind and
Cycle buttons simultaneously enables Cycle mode, and sets the left border of the Cycle
area (left locator) to the current song position.

Play
Plays from the current song position. If pressed during playback, it will stop playback.

Fast Forward Button
Holding the Fast Forward button moves the song position line forwards. Quickly
pressing the Fast Forward button once, moves the SPL one bar forward. Pressing the
Fast Forward and Cycle buttons simultaneously enables Cycle mode, and sets the right
border of the Cycle area (right locator) to the current song position.

Cycle
Activates/deactivates Cycle mode. By default, the Cycle area will fall between the first
two markers.
You can use the iControl to set the left or right locator to the current song position and
enable Cycle mode.
To define a new Cycle area, using the Cycle button:
1 Navigate to the desired left locator position with the Jog Wheel.
2 Do one of the following:
 Press the Cycle and Rewind buttons simultaneously, navigate to the desired right
locator position with the Jog Wheel, then press the Cycle and Fast Forward buttons
simultaneously.
 Hold down the Cycle button, navigate to the desired right locator position with the
Jog Wheel, then release the Cycle button.

Master Fader
Controls the level of the Master fader in the Mixer windows of Logic. This reduces the
level of all tracks, but does not affect their relative positions.

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

107

Assignment Overview
The following assignment tables are broken down into “zones” of the iControl.

Assignment Section
The Assignments button in the All Tracks and Selected Tracks area defines the behavior
of the channel strip buttons.
iControl button

Modifier

Function/Comments

Volume

—

Encoders control track’s Volume parameter.

Pan

—

Encoders control track’s Pan parameter.

Generator

—

Encoders control software instrument parameters.

Track Info

—

Encoders control track parameters.

EQ

—

Encoders control EQ parameters.

Effect 1

—

Encoders control Insert 3 parameters.

Effect 2

—

Encoders control Insert 4 parameter.

Option

—

Modifier for other controls; while held down, the modified control
either applies the function to all tracks or sets the parameter to its
minimum, default, or maximum value.

Arrow Up/Down

—

Shift fader bank left/right by number of channel strips.

Option

Shift fader bank to beginning or end.

Channel Strip (x8)
iControl

Modifier

Function/Comments

Encoder

—

Modify currently selected parameter.

Option

Set parameter to minimum, default, or maximum value.

—

Activates/Deactivates Record Enable button of track.

Option

Disable Record Enable button for all tracks.

—

Activates/Deactivates Solo button of track.

Option

Disable Solo button for all tracks.

—

Activates/Deactivates Mute button of track.

Option

Disable Mute button for all tracks.

—

Select track, except in Channel Strip mode.

Record Enable
Solo
Mute
Sel

108

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

Jog Wheel
iControl
Jog Wheel

Modifier

Function/Comments

—

Move Song Position Line.

Cycle

Set the Left locator to the current SPL, advance the SPL as per usual,
then set the Right locator to the new SPL position. Further Jog Wheel
turns (to the right) while holding down the Cycle button advances the
SPL and resets the Right locator position. Tip: rotating the Jog Wheel
counter-clockwise (to the left) while holding down Cycle defines a
skip-cycle range.

Transport Buttons
iControl

Modifier

Function/Comments

Record

—

Record

Return To Zero

—

Go to beginning of song

Rewind

—

Move the SPL one bar backward. If held, continue to scroll backwards.

Cycle

Engage Cycle function and set left locator to SPL.

Play

—

Play or Stop

Fast Forward

—

Move the SPL one bar forward. If held, continue to scroll forwards.

Cycle

Engage Cycle function and set right locator to SPL.

—

Switch Cycle mode on or off.

Cycle

Chapter 3 M-Audio iControl

109

4

EuCon Support of Euphonix MC
and System 5-MC

4

Logic Pro 7.2.1 supports the EuCon protocol developed by
Euphonix, enabling enhanced communication between the
MC or System 5-MC and Logic.
The following chapter describes how the MC and System 5-MC control Logic in EuCon
mode. Please note that this is an addendum to the MC operation manual and is limited
to descriptions of Logic specific features. Please refer to the device operating manuals
for more information about your control surface(s).

Setting Up the MC or System 5-MC With Logic
Please follow the steps outlined in the section below to use your MC or System 5-MC
with Logic.
To set up the MC or System 5-MC with Logic:
1 Set up your MC and/or CM408T units as described in the MC operation manual.
2 Install the EuConWS software (version 1.1.2 or later) on your Macintosh.
3 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is set up as a workstation on the MC (see MC
operation manual).
4 Assuming that the MC software is running on the MC: Select the Euphonix Menu icon
on the MC Touchscreen and choose the Prefs menu item, then go to the About tab.
Ensure that EuCon version is 1.1.2 or later. If it isn‘t, you‘ll need to update the EuCon
software. Go to the Euphonix website for more information.
Note: If you have been using an earlier EuCon version, you should delete or rename
the Logic Pro.xml file before installing newer EuCon versions. This file is used when
controlling Logic with the Euphonix device(s) HUI emulation, which causes conflicts
when controlling Logic in EuCon mode. Exit the MC and return to the operating system
by choosing Euphonix > Shutdown > Exit to Operating System, then open the
C:\Program Files\Euphonix\EuCon\UserSets\MCUser\MC_USER_SET__Root folder and
rename or delete the Logic Pro.xml file.

111

5 If you have a CM408T and the correct MC software is running: Choose Euphonix >
Prefs > Modules, select the CM408T in the “All Online” list, then touch “Add.”
6 Launch Logic Pro 7.2.1.
The startup screen advises that Logic is starting EuCon.
7 On the MC, press the workstation button associated with your Macintosh computer.
The MC display will show an “Attaching to Logic Pro” progress bar.
Note: The EuCon support of Logic is not achieved through special control surface plugins. As a consequence, you can not use the Control Surface Assignments Editor to
change assignments. You can only use the facilities provided by the MC or System 5MC. More information about this can be found in the operation manuals provided with
your EuCon device(s). EuCon devices do not appear in the Control Surfaces Setup
window.

Setting Up Soft Key Assignments
The “Logic Pro.xml” Application Set file—installed with EuCon version 1.1.2—features a
number of useful Soft Key assignments. The MC Touchscreen can be used to edit them.
To change a Soft Key assignment:
1 Select the respective Soft Key.
2 Touch the Euphonix Menu icon, then choose Setup in the ensuing pop-up menu.
3 Choose the desired EuCon command in the menu.
Logic supports the following EuCon commands:
 Key Commands: All Logic key commands (except the transport commands) are found
here. The Touchscreen uses the same hierarchy as the Key Commands window. Many
of these key commands switch between states (on/off, for example) or set a value.
Most also provide feedback on the Soft Key (as an example: a Soft Key assigned to
the Open/Close Score Editor command is illuminated when a Score Editor window is
open).
 Left Wheel/Right Wheel: The commands found here allow you to configure the left or
right wheel to perform a certain action when turned. This includes horizontal or
vertical zoom, waveform zoom, individual track zoom, move locators, adjust left
locator, adjust right locator, move drop locators, adjust drop in (punch in), adjust
drop out (punch out), move marker, adjust marker length, nudge selected Regions or
events, left/right pan (surround X), and front/back pan (surround Y).

112

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

Â Project > Markers: All markers defined in the open song are shown as a list. Assigning
a Soft Key to a marker command will display the marker title on the Soft Key LCD
display. Pressing the Soft Key will move the SPL to the marker start point. The Soft
Key is illuminated while the SPL falls within the marker boundaries. Renaming a
marker in Logic also changes the associated Soft Key title. Moving a marker, however,
disconnects the Soft Key from the marker.
 Transport: All transport related key commands are found here.
Note: Marker Soft Keys are a part of the Application Set, not the song data. Don’t forget
to save the User Set after defining a Marker Soft Key.

Main-Tracks Touchscreen
The MC Main-Tracks Touchscreen always displays a song‘s tracks (channels) in the Track
Mixer‘s (adaptive) Track view:
 The channels are laid out in the same order as in the Arrange window.
 Redundant tracks are suppressed (not accessible), where multiple tracks represent
the same output.
Note: Filtered selections (different view modes) are not reflected on the MC MainTracks Touchscreen track list.
The transport information is displayed as follows:
 SMPTE clock
 Bars/beats time
 Left locator
 Right locator

Main-Layouts
Layouts are automatically saved with the Logic song. When re-loading a song, all
defined layouts are available.

Faders
The following section outlines the functionality of the MC fader elements in Logic.

Solo Keys
This key activates the Solo button for each Audio Object.

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

113

On Keys
The MC On keys provide the same functionality as the Mute buttons in Logic, but work
in reverse: An MC On key must be lit to hear the channel. If a channel strip has been
muted in Logic, the corresponding MC channel On key is not illuminated. A track that is
not muted features a lit On key.

L LED
When the Logic track controlled by the fader belongs to an automation group, the L
LED on the channel strip is lit.

Touching Fader Selects Track Preference
Please note that the “Touching fader selects track” preference of Logic (Logic >
Preferences > Control Surfaces > Preferences) does not apply to the MC and System 5MC when they are used with the EuCon protocol. This function is offered by the MC
itself, with the “Select channel by touching fader/joystick“ preference.

Choosing Automation Modes
The MC and System 5-MC only support Read and Write automation modes. Logic,
however, also features Touch and Latch automation modes. When you use these
devices with Logic, activating the “Read and Write“ mode in the Touchscreen activates
Touch mode in Logic. Latch mode can not be activated with the MC or System 5-MC.
When you choose Latch mode with the mouse in Logic, the green R and red W LEDs
are lit (as per Read and Write mode).
To choose an automation mode:
1 Press the Wave and Select keys simultaneously.
2 Select the desired automation mode in the pop-up menu displayed on the
Touchscreen. You can choose between:
Â
Â
Â
Â

Isolate: Automation mode is off.
Read: Activates Read mode in Logic.
Write: Activates Write mode in Logic.
Read/Write: Activates Touch mode in Logic.

Note: If a write automation mode (Touch, Latch, Write) is active (and an automation
parameter enabled in the Logic > Preferences > Automation > Touch/Latch/Write Erase
settings is chosen), the red W LED is lit. The green LED is lit when a read automation
mode is active.

114

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

Knobsets
When using the Euphonix MC with Logic, a knobset contains pages, each comprised of
eight parameters.
The top level knobset leads to the following knobsets:
 Inserts: Pressing the Inserts Soft Key switches to a list of currently instantiated plugins (see the following section for details). The On key is lit if a plug-in is enabled (not
bypassed) and does not belong to the dynamic, EQ, or filter plug-in groups. (Please
note that this also applies to Audio Unit plug-ins.) Pressing the On key switches the
bypass state of all plug-ins that do not fall into the dynamic, EQ, or filter groups.
 Input: Pressing the Input Soft Key switches to input parameters (see “Input Knobset”
on page 116).
 Dyn: The Dyn Soft Key is not currently used to display a list, or allow editing, of
dynamic plug-ins. The On key is lit when any Dynamic plug-ins are enabled (not
bypassed). Please note that this only applies to Logic plug-ins, not Audio Unit plugins. Pressing the On key switches the bypass state of all Dynamic plug-ins.
 EQ: Pressing the EQ Soft Key switches to EQ editing (see “EQ Knobset” on page 118).
The On key is lit when EQ plug-ins are enabled (not bypassed). Please note that this
only applies to Logic plug-ins, not Audio Unit plug-ins. Pressing the On key switches
the bypass state of all EQ plug-ins.
 Sends: Pressing the Sends Soft Key switches to Send editing mode (see “Sends
Knobset” on page 118).
 Pan: Pressing the Pan Soft Key switches to Pan/Surround editing mode (see “Pan/
Surround Editing Knobset” on page 119).
 Groups: Pressing the Groups Soft Key switches to Group editing mode (see “Groups
Knobset” on page 119).
 Output: Pressing the Output Soft Key switches to Output parameter editing mode
(see “Output Knobset” on page 119).

Inserts (Configuration) Knobset
In this mode, the Soft Keys display the effect plug-ins inserted on the selected track.
If more than eight effect plug-ins are instantiated, you can use the right Page key of the
left Page key set to display ensuing plug-ins.
To edit an effect plug-in:
1 Press the Soft Key (or respective knob top) that features the name of the effect plug-in
that you wish to edit.
This switches to Effect Plug-in Editing mode. The parameters of the plug-in are
displayed in the order shown in the Controls view of the effect.
2 Turn the respective knob(s) to change the desired value(s).

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

115

Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value. For parameters
with only two values, the On key is lit when the value is 1 (or on) and unlit when the
value is 0 (or off ). Pressing the On key switches between the two value.
If the plug-in features more than eight parameters, use the left Page key set to navigate
between pages of parameters.
Pressing the Back key returns to the Inserts (Configuration) knobset.
To insert effect plug-ins:
1 In the Inserts (Configuration) Knobset mode, press both Page keys simultaneously.
This switches to Effect Insert mode. The Soft Keys display the first eight Insert slots of a
channel.
2 Select the desired Insert slot by pressing the respective knob top. You can use the left
Page key to display Insert slots 9 to 15.
When you press the respective knob top, the Soft Keys display the Logic plug-in menu
that appears when you click-hold on an Insert slot with the mouse.

∏

Tip: If the selected Insert slot already contains an effect plug-in, the MC reflects the
bold menu entries (indicating the selected plug-in name/type) with a lit On key.

3 Choose the desired effect plug-in:
 Pressing the Soft Key or knob top enters a submenu or inserts a selected effect plugin.
 Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy.

Input Knobset
If the Input knobset is active, the Soft Keys display all possible input values for audio
tracks:
 The first value is “--”, meaning no input.
 The currently active input value is indicated by a lit On key.
 Pressing the respective On key, Soft Key or knob top chooses the respective input
value.
 If there are more than eight values (inputs), the left Page key set switches to the
previous/next values.
 Pressing the two Page keys simultaneously switches to Input Configuration mode:
the Soft Keys display mode values (Mono, Stereo, Left, Right) for the track. Again, the
active value is indicated by a lit On key. Pressing the respective On key, Soft Key or
knob top chooses the respective value.
 Pressing the Back key returns to the top-level knobset.
On Audio Instrument tracks, the Input knobset displays the inserted instrument.

116

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

To edit an instrument:
m Press the respective knob top or Soft Key.
Instrument parameters are displayed in the order shown in the Controls view of the
plug-in. Turning a knob changes the parameter value. Pressing a knob top sets the
controlled parameter to its default value. For parameters with only two values, the On
key is lit when the value is 1 (or on) and unlit when the value is 0 (or off ).
To change or insert an instrument:
1 Press both Page keys simultaneously.
This switches to Insert Instrument mode. The Soft Key display indicates the Instrument
slot of the channel. When you press the knob top or Soft Key, the Soft Keys display the
Instrument plug-in menu that appears when you click-hold on an Instrument slot with
the mouse.
2 Choose the desired Instrument plug-in:
 Pressing the Soft Key or knob top enters a submenu or inserts a selected instrument
plug-in.
 Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy (or switches back
to the Input Knobset if you are in the top level of the menu).

Opening and Closing Plug-in windows
Logic supports the MC “Open plugins on workstation when editing” and “Close plugins
on workstation when exiting” preferences.
This behavior is dependent on the Link button being enabled in plug-in windows. If a
Link-enabled plug-in window is open:
 “Open plugins on workstation when editing” does not open a new window when a
new plug-in is selected, but will replace the open window’s contents.
 “Close plugins on workstation when exiting” does nothing.
Otherwise, “Open plug-ins on workstation when editing” opens a new plug-in window,
with the Link button disabled. “Close plugins on workstation when exiting“ closes the
Plug-in window.

Dyn(amic) Knobset
This knobset is not currently implemented.

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

117

EQ Knobset
This knobset allows you to edit the first EQ plug-in (Channel EQ or Linear Phase EQ).
There are two pages, with each band featuring two knobs. Page 1 shows the
parameters of the first, second, 7th, and 8th EQ bands. Page 2 shows the parameters of
EQ bands 3 to 6. When no Linear Phase or Channel EQ is present on the selected track,
pressing the last Soft Key in the second row (labeled AddChEQ) inserts a Channel EQ.
For each band:
 The upper knob controls either Frequency or Q. You can switch between Frequency
or Q with the Select key for the Knobset. Pressing the knob top sets the controlled
parameter to its default value.
 The lower knob controls Gain (or Slope). Again, pressing the knob top sets the
controlled parameter to its default value.
 The lower knob‘s On key switches the bypass state of the band. When the band is
bypassed, the On key is unlit. When the band is active, the On key is illuminated.
To return to the top-level knobset:
m Press the Back key.

Sends Knobset
The Sends knobset displays the current track send options.
 The Soft Key shows the send destination.
 The knob controls send level.
 The Select key switches between pre fader (off—unlit) and post fader (on—lit)
modes.
 The On key switches the bypass state of the send.
 Pressing both Page keys simultaneously enters Send Configuration mode (see the
following section).
 Pressing the Back key returns to the top-level knobset

Send Configuration Knobset
In Send Configuration mode, a list of the first eight Send slots is displayed.
When you touch the knob, the Soft Key shows the send level (provided the send slot is
already assigned to a bus).
To change a send destination:
1 Select the desired Send slot by pressing the respective Soft Key or knob top.
The first eight Send destinations are displayed. You can use the right Page key of the
left Page key set to display ensuing Send destinations.
2 Choose the desired destination by pressing the respective Soft Key or knob top.

118

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

To return to send editing mode:
m Press the Back key.

Pan/Surround Editing Knobset
This knobset displays the Pan parameter unless Surround mode is active on the track(s).
On tracks where Surround Mode is active, this knobset displays:
 Surround Angle
 Surround Diversity
 LFE
 Surround X (left/right)
 Surround Y (front/back)
 Center Level
Press the Back key to return to the top-level knobset. Pressing a knob top sets the
controlled parameter to its default value.

Groups Knobset
This knobset displays all currently used automation groups.
 The Soft Keys show group names. Press to choose the respective group(s).
 The On key displays and switches between active/inactive group membership for the
track.
 Pressing the Back key returns to the top-level knobset.

Output Knobset
If the Output knobset is active, the Soft Keys display all possible output values for the
track:
 The first value is “Surround,” the second is “--”, meaning no output.
 The currently active output is indicated by a lit On key.
 Pressing the On key, Soft Key, or knob top chooses the respective output value.
 If there are more than eight outputs, you can use the right Page key of the left Page
keys to display ensuing outputs.
 If the selected track is a surround track, pressing the two Page keys simultaneously
will switch to Surround Output Configuration mode: the Soft Keys display the
surround format parameters (Stereo, LCR, Center Only, Quadro, and so on) of a track.
Again, the active value is indicated by a lit On key and pressing the On key, Soft Key
or knob top chooses the respective value.
 Pressing the Back key returns to the top-level knobset.

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

119

Assignable Knob
The Assignable Knob can be used for control of any parameter that can be automated.
You must click on the target parameter with the mouse. Pointing with the mouse is not
sufficient to assign a parameter.
Pressing the knob top locks/unlocks the Assignable Knob. When locked, clicking a
parameter with the mouse will not reassign the Assignable Knob.
Both the On and the Smart key switch the currently assigned parameter between
values of 0 and 1 (useful for on/off parameters).

Monitors and Control Room
Logic Pro does not support EuCon monitoring control. Please use the Studio Monitor
Pro application.

Clear Keys
The “Clear Mute” and “Clear Solo” keys turn off Mute or Solo on all tracks. The Clear
Mute/Clear Solo key is lit when any track is muted/soloed.
The button without a label above the Clear Mute key provides a special feature on the
CM408T: when it is active (lit), pressing a CM408T key/knob activates the respective
view (knobsets, sub-menus, and so on) for all channels.

Track Control Bar
The Track Control Bar of the Logic Arrange window offers a special feature on the
Euphonix MC and System 5-MC devices: it shows “attentioned” tracks in light blue. All
currently “accessed” tracks are shown in dark blue.
Note: The color of the track control bar can not be changed in the Control Surface
Setup window.

System 5-MC Specific Features
This section describes how the System 5-MC‘s CM408T fader module controls Logic in
EuCon mode.

TFT Display
 Level meters: Display the level of the respective track. Two discrete stereo level
meters are shown for stereo tracks.
 Track Info section: Displays the track name, number, stereo/surround mode, input and
output assignments.

120

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

Â Graphs: In all knobsets (except EQ), the graph section displays the current pan or
surround position. If the EQ knobset is selected, the graph section displays the
current frequency response. If the EQ plug-in is bypassed, the curve is displayed in
gray, rather than green.
 Knobset assignment: The eight lines normally display the assignment of a knob. The
current value of a knob is displayed when it is touched. In the Output and Group
knobset, a green frame is shown around the text of knob cells with a lit On key.
 Color bar: The color corresponds to the color assigned to the audio channel (or Logic
instrument) of the track.

Two Keys Above Knobsets
Pressing the two keys above a knobset is equivalent to pressing the MC Back key: You
move up one level in the hierarchy, if applicable.

Knob Cells
The CM408T knob cells are almost identical to the MC knob cells. There is just one
difference: They feature a four-character LED, but no Soft Key.

Top Level Knobset Keys
These keys allow you to access knobsets directly:
 “*” (asterisk) key: Same as Inserts Soft Key (see “Inserts (Configuration) Knobset” on
page 115).
 Input: Accesses Input knobset (see “Input Knobset” on page 116)
 Dyn: Selects the Dynamic knobset (see “Dyn(amic) Knobset” on page 117).
 EQ: Selects the EQ/Filter knobset (see “EQ Knobset” on page 118).
 Aux: Selects the Sends knobset (see “Sends Knobset” on page 118).
 Pan: Selects the Pan knobset (see “Pan/Surround Editing Knobset” on page 119).
 Grp: Selects the Group knobset (see “Groups Knobset” on page 119).
 Mix: Selects the Output knobset (see “Output Knobset” on page 119).

In Keys
These keys allow you to switch the bypass status of particular plug-in types.
 Ins In key: Switches the bypass status of all plug-ins that do not belong to the
dynamic, EQ, or filter categories (please note that this also applies to Audio Unit
plug-ins).
 Dyn In: Switches the bypass status of all dynamic plug-ins (please note that this only
applies to Logic, not Audio Unit plug-ins).
 EQ In: Switches the bypass status of all EQ plug-ins (please note that this only applies
to Logic, not Audio Unit plug-ins).
 Filt In: Switches the bypass status of all filter plug-ins (please note that this only
applies to Logic, not Audio Unit plug-ins).

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

121

Identical Keys
The following CM408T keys work in the same fashion as their MC counterparts:
 Page/Configure key
 Channel Select key
 Rec key
 Solo key
 On key

122

Chapter 4 EuCon Support of Euphonix MC and System 5-MC

5

CM Labs Motormix

5

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Ensure that your Motormix unit(s) are connected bi-directionally with the MIDI
interface.
 Choose Logic Pro > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Setup.
 Choose the New > Install menu item from the Setup window’s local menu.
 Select “Motormix” in the Install window, choose “Add,” then set the appropriate MIDI
In and Out ports in the Setup window—for each Motormix unit.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (SHIFT, for example) below a button description
indicates that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this
modifier.

Select Buttons
The Select buttons (buttons just below the LCD) have multiple uses, depending on the
current mode.
Mode

Assignment

normal

Selects track displayed in upper LCD line. Tracks can be shifted to the left and right
with the View left and right buttons.

bank button Track View Select mode: selects type of tracks to be displayed:
LED flashing  1: Track View
 2: Arrange View
 3: Global View, MIDI tracks
 4: Global View, Input channels
 5: Global View, Audio tracks
 6: Global View, Audio Instruments
 7: Global View, Bus, and Aux channels
 8: Global View, Outputs, and Master

123

124

Mode

Assignment

WINDOW/
tool button
LED on

Opens, activates, or closes a window of a certain class.
LED off: If the window is not open, the button opens it.
LED on: If the window is open, but not active, the button activates it.
LED flashes: If the window is active, the button closes it.
 1: Arrange Window
 2: Track Mixer
 3: Event List
 4: Score Editor.
 5: Hyper Editor
 6: Matrix Editor.
 7: Transport window
 8: Audio window.

WINDOW/
tool button
flashes

Chooses a tool.
 1: Pointer
 2: Pencil
 3: Eraser
 4: Text tool
 5: Scissors
 6: Glue
 7: Solo tool
 8: Mute tool

PLAY/
transport
button
flashes

Transport section
 1: Record
 2: Pause
 3: Stop
 4: Play
 5: Rewind
 6: Fast Forward
 Upper LCD row displays current clock position.

STOP/locate
button
flashes

Locating functions
 1: Goes to left locator.
 2: Goes to right locator.
 3: Enables/Disables Cycle.
 4: Enables/Disables Drop.
 5: Enters Marker mode (see below).
 6: Opens floating Marker List.
 Upper LCD row displays current clock position.

Marker
mode

 1 to 6: Selects markers 1 to 6. Marker names are displayed in the upper LCD row.
 7: Creates a new marker.
 8: Deletes current marker.

Group Edit
mode

Switches between group parameters. Parameter view can be shifted by the View left
and right buttons when the SHIFT button is held down.

Plug-in
Assign

Enters Plug-in Edit mode for selected track.

Plug-in Edit

Enables/Disables parameter or resets it to default value.

Chapter 5 CM Labs Motormix

Mode

Assignment

Instrument
Assign

Enters Instrument Edit mode for selected track.

Instrument
Edit

Enables/Disables parameter or resets it to default value.

Note: In modal dialogs, the Select buttons generate the computer keyboard character
shown on the button face.

Rotary Pots
Control

Assignment

Rotary pots
1 to 8

Control parameter chosen with the Rotary Selector, as displayed in the 7 segment
display (see below).

7 segment
display

Shows current selection for Rotary pots:
Send editing (S-MUTE or PRE/PST LED is on):
 S1 to S8 = Send 1 to 8 level
 F1 to F8 = EQ band 1 to 8 frequency
 G1 to G8 = EQ band 1 to 8 gain
 q1 to q8 = EQ band 1 to 8 Q factor
Pan/Surround editing (select LED is on):
 Pn = Pan
 An = Surround Angle
 dv = Surround Diversity
 FE = Surround LFO
 Md = Assign Surround Mode
 X = Surround X
 Y = Surround Y
Track parameter editing (eff-4 LED is on):
 VL = Volume
 Pn or An = Pan/Surround Angle
 Md = Channel Mode
 In = Channel input
 Ou = Channel output
 Au = Automation mode
 Gr = Group membership
Assignment:
 d1 to d8 = Assign Send 1 to 8 destination
Plug-in editing (DSP/compare LED is on):
 P1 to 15 = Assign Insert slot 1 to 15 to plug-in
 P1. to 15. = Plug-in parameter editing
Instrument editing (DSP/compare LED is on):
 IA = Assign instrument
 IE. = Instrument parameter editing.
Group property editing (group LED is on):
 G1 to 32 = group number

Chapter 5 CM Labs Motormix

125

Control

Assignment

Rotary
Selector

Selects a slot or parameter for rotary encoders, depending on the parameter type(s)
being edited with the rotary encoders:
 Send slot when editing send level or assigning send destination.
 EQ band when editing an EQ parameter.
 Effect/Instrument slot when assigning an effect/instrument.
 Pan/Surround parameter when editing a Pan/Surround parameter.
 Track parameter when editing a Track parameter.
 Effect/instrument parameter page when editing a plug-in or instrument.

Rotary
Switches Flip mode between Off and Duplicate (faders duplicate rotary encoder
Selector
assignments).
push button
SHIFT Switches Display mode for channel strip displays: switches between:
 Page info in upper line, parameter name in lower line.
 Parameter name in upper line, parameter value in lower line.

Multi Buttons
These buttons (labelled A to H) have multiple uses, depending on the current mode, as
indicated by the green and yellow LEDs to the right.
Mode

Assignment

fx bypass

Enables/Disables bypass of currently selected insert effect.

SHIFT (eff-1) Enables/Disables bypass of currently selected EQ band and switches rotary encoders to
EQ frequency editing.
s-mute

Enables/Disables bypass of currently edited Send and switches rotary encoders to send
level editing.

SHIFT (eff-2) Enables/Disables bypass of currently selected EQ band and switches rotary encoders to
EQ Gain editing.
pre/post

Switches between pre and post of currently edited send and switches rotary encoders
to send level editing.
Post mode is indicated by a lit LED.

SHIFT (eff-3) Enables/Disables bypass of currently selected EQ band and switches rotary encoders to
(EQ) Q factor editing.
select

Switches rotary encoders to Pan/Surround editing. The edited parameter is selected
with the Rotary Selector.

SHIFT (eff-4) Switches rotary encoders to track parameter editing.

Note: In modal dialogs, the Multi buttons generate the computer keyboard character
shown on the button face.

126

Chapter 5 CM Labs Motormix

Burn Buttons
These buttons (labelled I to P) have multiple uses, depending on the current mode, as
indicated by the red LEDs to the left.
Mode

Assignment

record

Enables/Disables Record Enable status of track.
SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode to Latch.

ALL + SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode of all tracks to Latch.
write

Switches automation mode to Write.
ALL Switches automation mode of all tracks to Write.
SHIFT (fnctB) Switches automation mode to Read.
ALL + SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode of all tracks to Read.

burn

Switches automation mode to Touch.
ALL Switches automation mode of all tracks to Touch.
SHIFT (fnctC) Switches automation mode to Off.
ALL + SHIFT (fnctA) Switches automation mode of all tracks to Off.

Note: In modal dialogs, the Burn buttons generate the computer keyboard character
shown on the button face.

SOLO Buttons
These buttons switch the Solo status of the displayed track.
Note: In modal dialogs the Solo buttons generate the computer keyboard character
shown on the button face.

MUTE Buttons
These buttons switch the Mute status of the displayed track.
Note: In modal dialogs, the Solo buttons generate the computer keyboard character
shown on the button face.

Chapter 5 CM Labs Motormix

127

VIEW Section
Control

Assignment

Left/right
buttons

In Plug-in and Instrument Edit mode: shifts the parameter bank by one bank.
In other modes:
 If BANK LED is off: shifts the fader bank by one channel.
 If BANK LED is on: shifts the fader bank by one bank.

SHIFT In Plug-in and Instrument Edit mode: shifts the parameter bank by one parameter.
In Group Edit mode, the group parameter bank is shifted.
bank

Switches mode of left/right buttons (see above).
SHIFT Sets Select buttons to Track View Select mode (see below).

group

Sets Select buttons, rotary encoders and Multi buttons to Group Edit mode.
SHIFT Displays tracks’ group assignments in the LCD. The rotary encoders allow you to
change assignments.

Left Function Buttons
Control

Assignment

AUTO ENBL/mode

Currently unassigned.
SHIFT Switches rotary encoders to automation enable mode.

SUSPEND/create

While held down, the groups are temporarily disabled.
SHIFT Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode.

PLUG-IN/compare

Switches rotary encoders and Multi buttons to Plug-in Assign mode. The
Rotary Select knob is used to select the Insert slot you want to use/edit.
In Plug-in Assign or Instrument Assign mode, it switches to Pan mode.
In Plug-in Edit mode, it switches to Plug-in Assign mode.
In Instrument Edit mode, it switches to Instrument Assign mode.
SHIFT Switches rotary encoders and Multi buttons to Instrument Assign mode.

WINDOW/tools

Switches Select buttons to Window Select mode.
SHIFT Switches Select buttons to Select Tool mode.

ALL/alt/fine

While ALL/alt/fine is held down, rotary encoders are in full mode: rotating
counter-clockwise sets minimum, rotating clockwise sets maximum value.
SHIFT while SHIFT and ALL/alt/fine are held down, rotary encoders are in fine
mode.

DEFAULT/bypass

Currently unassigned.
SHIFT In Instrument Edit mode: switches bypass state of the instrument.
In Plug-in Edit mode: switches bypass state of the currently edited plug-in.

UNDO/save

Performs an Undo step. The LED is lit if there is a Redo step available.
SHIFT Saves the song. The LED is lit if the song contains unsaved changes.

SHIFT

128

Switches to Shift mode—where the functions indicated by the lower case
(inverted) labels below the buttons apply.

Chapter 5 CM Labs Motormix

Faders
The faders normally control volume, except when in Flip mode, where they duplicate
the rotary encoder assignments.

Right Function Buttons
Control

Assignment

PLAY/ transport

Play key command.
SHIFT Switches Select buttons to Transport Section mode.

STOP/locate

Stop key command.
SHIFT Switches Select buttons to Locate mode.

FFWD/monitor

Shuttle Forward key command.
SHIFT Opens System Performance window.

REWIND/status

Shuttle Rewind key command.
SHIFT Opens Synchronization window.

NEXT/configure

Navigates to next marker.

LAST/assign

When rotary encoders are displaying send destinations, use of LAST/assign
switches them back to displaying send levels.
Otherwise: goes to previous marker.
SHIFT When rotary encoders are displaying send levels, use of LAST/assign
switches them to displaying send destinations.
When rotary encoders are in Plug-in Edit mode, use of LAST/assign switches
them to Plug-in Assign mode.
When rotary encoders are in Instrument Edit mode, use of LAST/assign
switches them to Instrument Assign Mode.

ENTER/utility

Identical to Enter key on computer keyboard.
SHIFT Opens Automation Settings window.

ESCAPE

When LED is lit, escapes from “special” mode (denoted by flashing LED).
At all other times: identical to Esc key on computer keyboard.

Chapter 5 CM Labs Motormix

129

6

Frontier Design TranzPort

6

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Ensure that the software shipped with the TranzPort is installed.
 Make sure that the “Tranz Bridge” (the wireless transmitter) is connected to the
computer via USB.
 When Logic Pro 7 is launched, it installs the TranzPort automatically, and sets it to
“native mode.”

LCD
The LCD displays the following information:
 Top line left: name of currently displayed track.
 Top line middle: volume of currently displayed track.
 Top line right: panning of currently displayed track.
 Bottom line left: level meter of currently displayed track (stereo).
 Bottom line right: current clock position.

131

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned SHIFT (or other) button below a button description indicates that the
button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

Channel Strip
Control

Assignment



Shift the currently displayed track right by one track.
SHIFT Shift the currently displayed track right by eight tracks.

REC

Activate/Deactivate Record Enable button for the currently displayed track.
SHIFT Disable Record Enable button for all tracks.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo for the currently displayed track.
SHIFT Disable Solo for all tracks.

MUTE

Enables/Disables Mute for the currently displayed track.
SHIFT Disable Mute for all tracks.

ANY SOLO

Lit if any tracks or Regions are soloed.

UNDO

Undo
SHIFT Redo

Master Section
Control

Assignment

SHIFT

Modifier for function of other controls.

IN

Go to left Cycle locator.
PUNCH Engage Drop and set Drop In locator to SPL.
LOOP Engage Cycle and sets left Cycle locator to SPL.

OUT

Go to right Cycle locator.
PUNCH Engage Drop and set Drop Out locator to SPL.
LOOP Engage Cycle and set right Cycle locator to SPL.

PUNCH

Enables/Disables Drop mode.

LOOP

Enables/Disables Cycle mode.

PREV

Go to previous marker.
SHIFT Set locators by previous marker.

ADD

Create marker at SPL.
SHIFT Delete marker at SPL.

NEXT

Go to next marker.
SHIFT Set locators by next marker.

132

Chapter 6 Frontier Design TranzPort

Control

Assignment

Jog Wheel

Depending on current Jog Wheel mode:
• Move SPL by bars.
• Audio scrubbing or
• Shuttle.
SHIFT Adjust volume of the currently displayed track.
LOOP Set the Left locator to the current SPL, advance the SPL as per usual, then set
the Right locator to the SPL. Further Jog Wheel use while holding down LOOP
advances the SPL and sets the Right locator.
Tip: Rotating the Jog Wheel counter-clockwise while holding down LOOP
defines a skip-cycle range.
DROP Set the Drop In locator to the current SPL, advance the SPL as per usual, then
set the Drop Out locator to the SPL. Further jog wheel use while holding down
DROP advances the SPL and sets the Drop Out locator.

REW

Shuttle backward.
SHIFT Go to last play position.
PUNCH Engage Drop mode and set Drop In locator to SPL.
LOOP Engage Cycle mode and set left locator to SPL.

F FWD

Shuttle forward.
PUNCH Engage Drop mode and set Drop Out locator to SPL.
LOOP Engage Cycle moce and set right locator to SPL.

STOP

Stop
SHIFT Switch Jog Wheel modes between Move SPL by Bars, Audio Scrubbing and
Shuttle.

PLAY

Play
SHIFT Pause

RECORD

Record
SHIFT Save

External Input
Control

Assignment

Foot Switch

Drop In/Out

Chapter 6 Frontier Design TranzPort

133

7

JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk

7

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Install the software that ships with the CS-32.
 Ensure that the CS-32 is in Host mode:
 Make sure that your CS-32 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB or MIDI.
USB units are installed automatically. You must manually scan for MIDI units:
 Choose Logic > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Setup.
 Choose New > Install in the Setup window’s local menu.
 Select the CS-32 from the list in the Install window.
 Click the Scan button.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

Display
The 2-digit 7-segment display shows information on the current mode and currently
edited parameter:
Display text

Meaning

--

A “switching” parameter (Solo, Mute, Rec/Rdy) has been disabled.

AE

Mute buttons 1–6 display/set Automation Enable.

AS

Pots are in Pan/Send Assignment mode.

b1–b9

Pots are in Plug-in or Instrument bank select mode.

In

Pots are in Instrument Edit mode.

Lt

Mute buttons display/set “Latch” automation mode.

MI

Mute buttons display/set “MIDI” automation mode.

Mu

Mute has been enabled.

P1–P9

Pots are in Plug-in Edit mode.

135

Display text

Meaning

PA

Pots are in Pan/Send mode.

rd

Mute buttons display/set “Read” automation mode.

Re

Rec/Rdy has been enabled.

So

Solo has been enabled.

Tc

Mute buttons display/set “Touch” automation mode.

Wr

Mute buttons display/set “Write” automation mode.

Other text

When a track is selected, the first two characters of its name are shown briefly.

Numbers

While editing a numerical value with a fader or pot, the current value is
displayed. If there are more than two digits, only the last digits of the mantissa
are displayed. Signs (+/–) are only shown if only one digit is displayed.

Pots
As the pots are not motorized, Pickup mode is used, if enabled in the Control Surfaces
preferences. This means that the pots will not “take over” until NULLed. NULL status is
displayed by the NULL arrow LEDs. The Upper arrow is lit if the pot’s value is above the
NULL point, the Lower arrow is lit if the pot’s value is below the NULL point, and both
arrow LEDs are lit if NULLed.
The pots can operate in one of three modes, with one sub-mode each.
Pan/Send Mode
In Pan/Send mode (enabled with F7; display shows “PA”), the pots control global track
parameters:
Control

Assignment

SEND A/P1

Controls Send 1 Level of selected track.

SEND B/P2

Controls Send 2 Level of selected track.

PAN/P3

Controls Pan of selected track.

SEND C/P4

Controls Send 3 Level of selected track.

SEND D/P5

Controls Send 4 Level of selected track.

SEND E/P6

Controls Send 5 Level of selected track.

While SHIFT is held down (display shows “AS”), the pots perform the following
assignments:

136

Control

Assignment

SEND A/P1

Assigns Send 1 Destination of selected track.

SEND B/P2

Assigns Send 2 Destination of selected track.

PAN/P3

Assigns Track mode of selected track.

SEND C/P4

Assigns Send 3 Destination of selected track.

Chapter 7 JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk

Control

Assignment

SEND D/P5

Assigns Send 4 Destination of selected track.

SEND E/P6

Assigns Send 5 Destination of selected track.

Instrument Edit Mode
In Instrument Edit mode (enabled with F8; display shows “In”), the pots control
instrument parameters.
With SHIFT held down (display shows “b1”–“b9”), you can choose the parameter bank
(see “Cursor Section” on page 139).
Plug-in Edit Mode
In Plug-in Edit mode (enabled with F9, display shows “P1”–”P9”), the pots control plugin parameters of the currently selected insert.
With SHIFT held down (display shows “b1”–”b9”), you can choose the current insert and
parameter bank (see “Cursor Section” on page 139).

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

PAN SELECT/TRACK
SELECT

Selects track.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.

LOCATE

Navigates to markers 1–32.
SHIFT LOCATE 17:
LOCATE 18:
LOCATE 19:
LOCATE 25:
LOCATE 26:
LOCATE 28:
LOCATE 29:
LOCATE 30:
LOCATE 31:
LOCATE 32:

MUTE

Creates new marker.
Creates new marker without rounding.
Deletes marker at SPL.
Opens Marker List.
Opens Marker Text window.
Sets locators by previous marker.
Sets locators by current marker.
Sets locators by next marker.
Navigates to previous marker.
Navigates to next marker.

Enables/Disables Mute.
F1 Automation Enable setup (display shows “AE”).
MUTE 1: Enables/Disables volume automation.
MUTE 2: Enables/Disables pan automation.
MUTE 3: Enables/Disables mute automation.
MUTE 4: Enables/Disables automation of solo.
MUTE 5: Enables/Disables send automation.
MUTE 6: Enables/Disables automation of plug-in parameters.
F2 Displays/sets automation mode to “Read” (display shows “Td”).
F3 Displays/sets automation mode to “Touch” (display shows “Tc”).
F4 Displays/sets automation mode to “Latch” (display shows “Lt”).

Chapter 7 JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk

137

Control

Assignment
F5 Displays/sets automation mode to “Write” (display shows “Wr”).
F6 Displays/sets automation mode to “MIDI” (display shows “MI”).

ARM

Activates/Deactivates Record Enable button.

Faders

Control volume. As the faders don’t offer feedback, Pickup mode is used, if
enabled in the Control Surfaces preferences. This means that they will not “take
over” until NULLed. NULL status is displayed by the NULL arrow LEDs. Upper
arrow is lit if the pot’s value is above the NULL point, the lower arrow is lit if the
pot’s value is below the NULL point, and both are lit if NULLed.

Bank Button
Control

Assignment

(Small red button
with green LED)

LED off: black labels of channel strip buttons apply (TRK/LOC/ARM).
LED on: white labels of channel strip buttons apply (PAN/SOLO/MUTE).

F Key Section
Control

Assignment

SHIFT

Modifier for function of other controls. See right-aligned “SHIFT” in left column.

F1

While held down, MUTE buttons 1–6 enables/disables automation of certain
parameters (see MUTE).
SHIFT Enables/Disables Cycle mode.

F2

While held down, MUTE buttons set automation mode to Read.
SHIFT Enables/Disables Drop mode.

F3

While held down, MUTE buttons set automation mode to Touch.
SHIFT Sets left locator by current SPL.

F4

While held down, MUTE buttons set automation mode to Latch.
SHIFT Sets right locator by current SPL.

F5

While held down, MUTE buttons set automation mode to Write.
SHIFT Sets Drop In locator by current SPL.

F6

While held down, MUTE buttons set automation mode to MIDI.
SHIFT Sets Drop Out locator by current SPL.

F7

Sets pots to Pan/Send mode (display shows “PA”).
SHIFT Enables/Disables metronome click.

138

F8

Sets pots to Instrument Edit mode (display shows “In”).

F9

Sets pots to Plug-in Edit mode (display shows “P1”–”P9”).

Chapter 7 JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk

Cursor Section
Control
Up

Assignment
Zooms out vertically.
SHIFT In Plug-in edit mode: decrements current Insert slot.

Down

Zooms in vertically.
SHIFT In Plug-in Edit mode: increments current Insert slot.

Left

Zooms out horizontally.
SHIFT In Instrument and Plug-in Edit modes: decrements current parameter bank.

Right

Zooms in horizontally.
SHIFT In Instrument and Plug-in Edit modes: increments current parameter bank.

Transport Section
Control

Assignment

RECORD

Record

STOP

Stop

REW

Moves SPL backward by one bar.

PLAY

Play

F FWD

Moves SPL forward by one bar.

Jog Wheel Section
Control

Assignment

Jog Wheel

SCRUB off: moves SPL in bars.
SCRUB on: Audio Scrubbing.
SHUTTLE on: Shuttle mode.

SCRUB

Switches Jog Wheel between Move SPL by Bars and Audio Scrubbing mode.

SHUTTLE

Switches Jog Wheel between Move SPL by Bars and Shuttle mode.

Chapter 7 JLCooper CS-32 MiniDesk

139

8

JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100

8

Requirements
You need one or more FaderMaster 4/100 (MIDI or USB version) units with firmware
version 1.03 or higher.
Important: If you have older firmware (see the sticker on the back of the unit), please
contact JLCooper.

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 USB model only: install the software that ships with the FaderMaster 4/100.
 Ensure that your FaderMaster 4/100 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB or
MIDI.
USB units are installed automatically.
You must manually scan for MIDI units:
1 Choose Logic > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose New > Install in the Setup window’s local menu.
3 Select the FaderMaster 4/100 from the list in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.
Note: You can combine several FaderMaster 4/100 units to form one large virtual
control surface. The meaning/functionality of the Track buttons, however, are
individually switched for each unit.

141

Assignment Overview
The following assigment tables are broken down into “zones” of the FaderMaster 4/100.

Global buttons
Control

Assignment

Select

Switches Track buttons to track selection.

Aux

Switches Track buttons to Record Ready.

Solo

Switches Track buttons to Solo.

Mute

Switches Track Buttons to Mute.

Inc

Increases fader bank display to show next four tracks.

Dec

Decreases fader bank display to show previous four tracks.

Channel Strip

142

Control

Assignment

Track button

Performs currently selected function (Select, Record Ready, Solo, Mute).

Fader

Controls volume (touch sensitive and motorized).

Chapter 8 JLCooper FaderMaster 4/100

9

Korg microKONTROL and
KONTROL49

9

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro.
 Ensure that your unit(s) is/are connected to the computer via USB.
 Boot Logic, and the unit(s) will be scanned for, and installed automatically.
 When Logic launches, the microKONTROL/KONTROL49 is automatically set to “Native
mode”—internal Scene settings are ignored.
Note: If installation and identification fails, it may be possible that the microKONTROL/
KONTROL49 reaction time is too slow, due to USB bus-power issues. In this situation,
connect the supplied power adapter, and set the power switch to the “DC” position.
When Logic quits (or the icon is removed from the Control Surface Setup window), the
microKONTROL/KONTROL49 is reset to normal operation.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (shown below a button description) indicates that the
button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

Pads
The Pads can operate in one of eight modes and three overlays. While pressing SCENE,
the Pads allow you to select modes for the Pads and channel strips. Releasing SCENE
without pressing a Pad does not affect the currently selected Pad or Channel Strip
modes.
Pad

Assignment

1

Switches Pads to Transport mode.

2

Switches Pads to Solo/Mute mode.

3

Switches Pads to Rec/Select mode.

4–8

Switches Pads to User 4–8 mode.
These modes have unassigned Pads. You can add assignments to key
commands with the Learn function.

9

Switches channel strips to Pan mode.

143

Pad

Assignment

10

Switches channel strips to Send mode.

11

Switches channel strips to Automation mode.

12

Switches channel strips to Instrument Edit mode.

13

Switches channel strips to Plug-in Edit mode.

14–16

Switches channel strips to User 6–8 mode.
These modes have unassigned encoders. You can add assignments with the
Logic Learn function.

Transport Mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 1.
Pad

Assignment

1

Sets main encoder to Transport mode.

2

Sets main encoder to Scrub mode.

3

Sets main encoder to Shuttle mode.

7

Switches sync between internal and external.

8

Enables/Disables metronome click (separately for Playback and Record).

9

Enables/Disables Cycle function.

10

Enables/Disables Drop function.

11

Enables/Disables Replace function.

12

Enables/Disables Solo function.

13

Record

14

Pause

15

Play

16

Stop

Solo/Mute Mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 2.
Pad

Assignment

1–8

Enables/Disables Solo for the eight tracks being controlled with the eight
channel strips.

9–16

Enables/Disables Mute for the eight tracks being controlled with the eight
channel strips.

Rec/Select Mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 3.

144

Pad

Assignment

1–8

Activates/Deactivates Record Enable button for the eight tracks being
controlled with the eight channel strips.

9–16

Selects one of the eight tracks being controlled with the eight channel strips.

Chapter 9 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49

User 4–8 Modes
These modes are enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 4 to 8.
In these modes, the Pads are unassigned. Use the Learn function (Logic > Preferences >
Control Surfaces > Learn Assignment for xxx) to assign them to key commands, for
example.
Send Mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 10.
Send overlay
Pressing SETTING while the encoders are in Send mode, changes the operation of the
Pads in Send mode.
Pad

Assignment

1–8

Switches send bypass state of the currently selected send for the eight channel
strips.

9–16

Switches send position (Pre/Post) of the currently selected send for the eight
channel strips.

Plug-in Edit Mode
This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 13.
Plug-in Edit overlay
Pressing SETTING while the encoders are in Plug-in Edit mode changes the operation of
the Pads in Plug-in Edit mode.
Pad

Assignment

1–8

Switches plug-in bypass state of the currently selected Insert slot for the eight
channel strips.

Main Section
The main LCD shows information on the current mode of the encoders.
Display text

Meaning

 Encoders edit Instrument parameters.


Encoders edit Plug-in parameters (xx is for the currently selected insert).

Automatn

Encoders control Automation mode.

Ins. x

(SETTING held down) Main encoder chooses Plug-in insert.

ModePad?

Displayed while SCENE button is held down.

Pan

Encoders control pan.

Send x

Encoders control send level of send x.

User 6

Channel Strip User Mode 6. Encoders are initially unassigned.

User 7

Channel Strip User Mode 7. Encoders are initially unassigned.

User 8

Channel Strip User Mode 8. Encoders are initially unassigned.

Chapter 9 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49

145

The LCD backlight is red while recording, and green at other times.
The controls in the main section have the following meaning:
Control

Assignment

Main encoder

Controls SPL in one of three modes (see Pads 1–3 in “Transport Mode” on
page 144).

SETTING

Held down in Send mode:
 Main encoder chooses current send.
 Pads have special meaning—see “Send Mode” on page 145.
 LCDs display send destinations.
 Encoders choose send destinations.
Holding down in Plug-in Edit mode:
 Main encoder chooses current plug-in insert.
 Pads have special meaning—see “Plug-in Edit overlay” on page 145.
 LCDs display plug-in name of the eight tracks.

MESSAGE

Enables/Disables Flip mode. When enabled, the encoders control volume and
the faders control the parameter displayed in the LCDs.

SCENE

While held down, pads switch Pad and Channel Strip modes. See “Pads” on
page 143.

EXIT

—

HEX LOCK

Shifts fader bank to the previous eight tracks (LED is on if previous tracks exist).

ENTER

Shifts fader bank to the next eight tracks (LED is on if subsequent tracks exist).

<

Octave Shift Down

>

Octave Shift Up

Channel Strips
There are several modes for the encoders, enabled with SCENE and Pad 9–16.
Control

Assignment

LCD

Shows the parameter controlled by the encoder. The currently chosen value is
displayed for a few seconds while operating an encoder or fader.
When the encoders are in a multi-channel view (Pan, Send, Send Setup), the
background color indicates the track’s automation mode:
 green—off or Read
 yellow—Touch or Latch
 red—Write or MIDI

Encoder

Controls the parameter shown directly above the encoder in the LCD.

Fader

Controls volume. As the faders don’t offer feedback, “Pickup mode” is used if
enabled in the Logic Preferences. This means that they will not “take over” until
NULLed.

External Input

146

Control

Assignment

Foot Switch

Starts and stops playback.

Pedal

Controls master volume.

Chapter 9 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49

10

Mackie Baby HUI

10

Set Up
Please make sure that your Baby HUI unit(s) is/are connected bi-directionally with the
computer.
You must manually scan for Mackie Baby HUI units:
1 Choose Logic > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose New > Install in the Setup window’s local menu.
3 Select Baby HUI in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned SHIFT below a button description indicates that the control has an
alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Rotary encoder

Adjusts parameter selected in the Encoder Assignment section.

Rotary encoder
push button

Selects track.

SHIFT Enables/Disables Record Ready.
Signal indicator

Illuminates when a signal is present in the channel. It also indicates channel
selection.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.

MUTE

Enables/Disables Mute.

Fader

Adjusts volume.

147

Encoder Assignment Section
Control

Assignment

PAN

Assigns Pan to rotary encoders.

SEND 1

Assigns Send 1 Level to rotary encoders.

SEND 2

Assigns Send 2 Level to rotary encoders.

SEND 3

Assigns Send 3 Level to rotary encoders.

SEND 4

Assigns Send 4 Level to rotary encoders.

Automation Section
Control

Assignment

BYPASS/OFF

Sets selected track to automation mode Off.
SHIFT Enables/Disables automation playback and recording of volume.

READ

Sets selected track to automation mode Read.
SHIFT Enables/Disables automation playback and recording of mute.

WRITE

Sets selected track to automation mode Write.
SHIFT Enables/Disables automation playback and recording of pan.

TOUCH

Sets selected track to automation mode Touch.
SHIFT Enables/Disables automation playback and recording of Send Level.

Display Section
Control

Assignment

TRANSPORT

Opens/Closes the Transport window.

MEM–LOC

Opens/Closes the Marker List.

MIXER

Opens/Closes the Track Mixer.

EDIT

Opens/Closes the Arrange window.

Utility Section

148

Control

Assignment

UNDO

Performs Undo.

SHIFT

Shifts to alternate use of some buttons (see below).

Chapter 10 Mackie Baby HUI

Navigation Section
Control

Assignment

RTZ

Navigates to the left locator.
SHIFT Sets Drop In locator.

END

Navigates to the right locator.
SHIFT Sets Drop Out locator.

BANK SELECT Left

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.
SHIFT Shifts channel strips by one channel to the left.

BANK SELECT Right

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.
SHIFT Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right.

Transport Section
Control

Assignment

REWIND

Shuttles backward.

FAST FWD

Shuttles forward.

STOP

Stop

PLAY

Play

RECORD

Record

Chapter 10 Mackie Baby HUI

149

11

Mackie C4

11

Set Up
A powered Mackie C4 unit will automatically be detected when Logic Pro is launched.
You can use the C4 in an independent control surface group (with other control surface
icons placed above/below the C4 icon), or combined into one control surface group
with one or more control surfaces (such as the Logic Control—place the icon to the
right or left of the existing icon(s).
Although the C4 can be used independently, it is most useful when combined with
other control surfaces, particularly the Logic/Mackie Control. In the latter case, the C4
adds eight channels in Multi Channel view. Using the C4 in its own control surface
group allows you to edit instruments and plug-ins independently, while performing
mixing and other tasks on the Logic/Mackie Control or other control surface.

V-Pots, V-Selects
Functionality depends on current view mode, and optional overlay (see below).
 The top row (row 1) consists of V-Pot/V-Select 1 to 8.
 Row 2 consists of V-Pot/V-Select 9 to 16.
 Row 3 consists of V-Pot/V-Select 17 to 24.
 The bottom row (row 4) consists of V-Pot/V-Select 25 to 32.

V-Pot/V-Select 1 to 8
While no overlay is active, V-Pot/V-Selects 1 to 8 (the top row) normally perform in the
same way as their counterparts on a Logic Control or Logic Control XT. See “The
Assignment Zone” on page 54.

V-Pot/V-Select 9 to 32
These V-Pots have additional functionality in many views.
In Multi Channel views, the V-Pot/V-Selects of rows 2, 3 and 4 usually edit the
parameter that “follows” the parameter edited on row 1.

151

Example: In Pan Multi Channel view (see “Multi Channel View” on page 57); where row
1 edits the Pan/Surround Angle, row 2 edits Surround Diversity, row 3 edits LFE and
row 4 edits Surround mode.
In Channel Strip view, all four rows build a group of 32 editable parameters.
In Plug-in and Instrument Edit views, it can be split into two groups (8/24, 16/16 or 24/8
parameters), see “SPLIT” on page 157.

Pan/Surround Multi Channel View
In Pan/Surround Multi Channel view:
 Row 1 edits Pan/Surround parameter 1.
 Row 2 edits Pan/Surround parameter 2.
 Row 3 edits Pan/Surround parameter 3.
 Row 4 edits Pan/Surround parameter 4 (in this order; Pan/Angle, Diversity, LFE,
Surround Mode, X, Y).
SINGLE Left/Right changes the parameter edited in row 1, thus affecting the
parameters shown and edited in rows 2 to 4.
To access Pan/Surround Multi Channel view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 18 (labeled Surrnd MultiC).

Pan/Surround Channel Strip View
In Pan/Surround Channel Strip view, row 1 edits all eight surround parameters of a
surround channel. If a stereo or mono channel is selected, V-Pot 1 edits the Pan (or
Balance) parameter.
To access Pan/Surround Channel Strip view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 26 (labeled Surrnd).

Track Multi Channel View
In Track Multi Channel View, the lowest V-Pot row (row 4) edits the currently chosen
track parameter. Row 3 edits track parameter 2, Row 2 track parameter 3, and row 1
track parameter 4.
The row order is reversed, so that the lowest row (editing parameter 1) is closest to the
buttons.

152

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

The V-Pots edit the following track parameters in this order: Volume, Pan/Angle, Track
Mode, Input, Output, Automation Mode, Group, Displayed Automation Parameter).
BANK Left/Right and SINGLE Left/Right change the parameter edited in row 4, thus
affecting the parameters shown/edited in rows 1 to 3.
To access Track Multi Channel view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 17 (labeled Track MultiC).

EQ Multi Channel View
In EQ Multi Channel view:
 Row 1 edits EQ band bypass.
 Row 2 edits EQ band frequency.
 Row 3 edits EQ band gain/slope.
 Row 4 edits EQ band Q factor.
 The SLOT UP/DOWN buttons select the EQ band.
This only works if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted in the selected channel strip.
To access EQ Multi Channel view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 19 (labeled EQ MultiC).

EQ Channel Strip View
In EQ Channel Strip view:
 Row 1 edits EQ Frequency of all eight bands.
 Row 2 edits EQ Gain/Slope of all eight bands.
 Row 3 edits EQ band Q factor of all eight bands.
 Row 4 edits EQ bypass of all eight bands.
If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected track, a Channel EQ will be
inserted automatically when the EQ Channel Strip view is entered. The TRACK L and
TRACK R buttons switch to the previous or next track. If you switch to a track with no
Channel or Linear Phase EQ inserted, the C4 displays show “–” and the V-Pots do
nothing.
To access EQ Channel Strip view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

153

2 Press V-Select 27 (labeled EQs).

Send Multi Channel View
In Send Multi Channel view:
 Row 1 edits send destination.
 Row 2 edits send level.
 Row 3 edits send position.
 Row 4 edits send mute.
 The SLOT UP/DOWN button selects the edited Send slot.
 The TRACK L and TRACK R buttons shift the fader bank left or right by the number of
channel strips in the control surface group.
To access Send Multi Channel view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 20 (labeled Sends MultiC).

Send Channel Strip View
In Send Channel Strip view:
 Row 1 edits the eight send destinations of the channel strip.
 Row 2 edits the send level of sends 1 to 8
 Row 3 edits send positions 1 to 8.
 Row 4 edits send mutes 1 to 8.
 TRACK L and TRACK R switch to the previous or next track.
To access Send Channel Strip view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 28 (labeled Sends).

Plug-in Select Multi Channel View
In Plug-in Select Multi Channel view, the C4 displays the first four Insert slots of the
eight selected channels.
 Turn a V-Pot to switch between plug-ins.
 Press the respective V-Select to insert the selected effect. This enters Plug-in Edit
view, where you can directly edit plug-in parameters. See the section below for more
information.
 The SLOT UP/DOWN buttons switch between Insert slots.
 TRACK L and TRACK R shift the fader bank left or right by the number of channel
strips in the control surface group.

154

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

Â Holding SHIFT and pressing a V-Select switches the bypass state of the respective
Insert slot. Bypassed plug-ins are denoted by an asterisk which precedes the plug-in
name(s).
To access Plug-in Select Multi Channel view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 21 (labeled PlugIn MultiC).

Plug-in Edit View
In Plug-in Edit view:
 V-Pot/V-Select 1 to 32 builds a group of 32 parameters. Splitting is possible.
 SLOT UP/DOWN button selects the desired plug-in insert slot.
 BANK Left/Right shifts the edited parameters by one page. In Split mode, this applies
to Split Upper. When holding down SHIFT, this applies to Split Lower.
 SINGLE Left/Right shifts the edited parameters by 1. In Split mode, this applies to
Split Upper. When holding down SHIFT, this applies to Split Lower.
To access Plug-in Edit view:
m Access Plug-in Select Multi Channel view, then insert or select a plug-in (see section
above for details).
This automatically switches to Plug-in Edit view.

Instrument Select Multi Channel View
In Instrument Select Multi Channel view, the C4 displays the Instrument slots of the
selected instrument channels.
 Turn a V-Pot to select an instrument.
 Press the respective V-Select to insert the selected instrument. This enters Instrument
Edit view, where you can edit instrument parameters. See the section below for more
information.
 TRACK L and TRACK R shift the fader bank left or right by the number of channel
strips in the control surface group.
 Holding SHIFT and pressing a V-Select switches the bypass state of the respective
Instrument slot. An asterisk symbol precedes the name of bypassed instruments.
To access Instrument Select Multi Channel view:
1 Hold the CHAN STRIP button.
The Channel Strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays.
2 Press V-Select 22 (labeled Instru MultiC).

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

155

Instrument Edit View
In Instrument Edit View:
 V-Pot/V-Select 1 to 32 builds a group of 32 parameters. Splitting is possible.
 BANK Left/Right shifts the edited parameters by one page. In Split mode, this applies
to Split Upper. When holding down SHIFT, this applies to Split Lower.
 SINGLE Left/Right shifts the edited parameters by 1. In Split mode, this applies to
Split Upper. when holding down SHIFT, this applies to Split Lower.
To access Instrument Edit view:
m Access Instrument Select Multi Channel view, then insert or select an instrument (see
section above for details).
This automatically switches to Instrument Edit view.

Cycle View
Holding the CHAN STRIP button and pressing V-Select 31 activates Cycle view. In this
mode, the V-Pots/V-Selects behave as follows:
 V-Pot/V-Select 1 (labeled Cycle): shows and edits the current Cycle status (off or on).
 V-Select 2 (labeled BySet): matches the Cycle area to selections made in the Arrange
window (selected Audio or MIDI Region).
 V-Pot 3 (labeled Move): moves the current Cycle area by a bar with each “click” of the
V-Pot, when turned.
 V-Pot 4: moves the current Cycle area by a beat with each “click” of the V-Pot, when
turned.
 The display shows the left and right locators above V-Pots 5 and 7.
 Pressing V-Select 5 picks up (uses) the current song position for the left locator.
 Turning V-Pot 5 changes the left locator position by bars.
 Turning V-Pot 6 changes the left locator position by beats (denominator steps).
 Pressing V-Select 7 picks up (uses) the current song position for the right locator.
 Turning V-Pot 7 changes the right locator position by bars.
 Turning V-Pot 8 changes the right locator position by beats (denominator steps).

Drop View
Holding the CHAN STRIP button and pressing V-Select 32 activates Drop (also called
“punch”) view. In this mode, the V-Pots/V-Selects behave as follows:
 V-Pot/V-Select 1 shows and edits the current Drop status (off or on).
 V-Pot 3 (labeled Move): moves the current Drop-in area by a bar with each “click” of
the V-Pot, when turned.
 V-Pot 4: moves the current Drop-in area by a beat with each “click” of the V-Pot,
when turned.
 The display shows the Drop In and Drop Out locators above V-Pots 5 and 7.

156

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â

Pressing V-Select 5 picks up (uses) the current song position for the Drop In locator.
Turning V-Pot 5 changes the Drop In locator position by bars.
Turning V-Pot 6 changes the left locator position by beats (denominator steps).
Pressing V-Select 7 picks up (uses) the current song position for the Drop Out locator.
Turning V-Pot 7 changes the Drop Out locator position by bars.
Turning V-Pot 8 changes the right locator position by beats (denominator steps).

Note: Changing a drop locator position with the C4 automatically enables Drop mode.

Buttons at Bottom
The following section outlines the functionality of the buttons found at the bottom of
the C4 control surface.

SPLIT
Switches edit split between 4/0, 1/3, 2/2 and 3/1 rows. Split Edit allows you to
simultaneously edit two separate sections of a plug-in/instrument, or even two
different plug-ins.
Split Edit is also possible across multiple C4 units. As an example with two units,
pressing the SPLIT button offers the following split modes:
 1/7 (Split Upper is top line of first unit, Split Lower is bottom 3 lines of first unit and
all lines of second unit. LED 1/3 is lit.)
 2/6 (Split Upper is top two lines of first unit, Split Lower is bottom two lines of first
unit and all lines of second unit. LED 2/1 is on.)
 3/5 (LED 3/1 is on.)
 4/4 (all three LEDs are on.)
 5/3 (all three LEDs are on.)
 6/2 (all three LEDs are on.)
 7/1 (all three LEDs are on.)

LOCK
Activates/deactivates Track Lock. When enabled, selecting a track does not switch the
current track selection.

SPOT ERASE
Currently unassigned.

MARKER
Switches between Marker overlay (see “Marker Overlay” on page 160) and normal view.

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

157

TRACK
Switches between Track overlay (see “Track Overlay” on page 160) and normal view.
Alternate mode options
Holding down the TRACK button accesses a further submenu in the lower LCD,
enabling you to enter Global view with a certain Object type:
 V-Select 25 switches to MIDI tracks.
 V-Select 26 switches to Input Objects.
 V-Select 27 switches to Audio tracks.
 V-Select 28 switches to Audio Instrument tracks.
 V-Select 29 switches to Auxiliary Objects.
 V-Select 30 switches to Bus Objects.
 V-Select 31 switches to Outputs.
 V-Select 32 switches to Master Output.
Releasing the TRACK button without pressing a V-Select returns to Mixer view.

CHAN STRIP
Switches between Channel Strip overlay (see “Channel Strip Overlay” on page 160) and
normal view.
Alternate mode options
Holding down the CHAN STRIP button accesses a further submenu in the lower LCD:
 V-Select 9 to 16 switches to one of eight user modes, where you can freely assign
parameters to V-Pots or V-Selects.
 V-Select 17 switches to Track Multi Channel view (see “Track Multi Channel View” on
page 152).
 V-Select 18 switches to Pan/Surround Multi Channel view (see “Pan/Surround Multi
Channel View” on page 152).
 V-Select 19 switches to EQ Multi Channel view (see “EQ Multi Channel View” on
page 153).
 V-Select 20 switches to Sends Multi Channel view (see “Send Multi Channel View” on
page 154).
 V-Select 21 switches to Plug-in Select Multi Channel view (see “Plug-in Select Multi
Channel View” on page 154).
 V-Select 22 switches to Instrument Select Multi Channel view (see “Instrument Select
Multi Channel View” on page 155).
 V-Select 26 switches to Pan/Surround Channel Strip view (see “Pan/Surround
Channel Strip View” on page 152).
 V-Select 27 switches to EQ Channel Strip view (see “EQ Channel Strip View” on
page 153).

158

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

Â V-Select 28 switches to Send Channel Strip view (see “Send Channel Strip View” on
page 154).
 V-Select 31 activates the Cycle view (see “Cycle View” on page 156).
 V-Select 32 activates the Drop view (see “Drop View” on page 156).

FUNCTION
Switches between Function overlay (see “Function Overlay” on page 161) and normal
view.

Modifier Buttons
The four buttons in this area are similar to those found on your computer keyboard
(but are independent of the keyboard modifiers). Many Logic functions behave
differently when one or more “modifier” key(s) is pressed, in conjunction with another
key or mouse click. This also applies to the C4 control surface. All “modified” C4
commands are covered in each function description.
Here is a generic description of the modifier button functions:
 SHIFT: Switches other buttons to alternate function.
 OPTION: While held down, parameters are set to the minimum, default or maximum
value when edited with a V-Pot.
 CTRL: Disables the Group function.
 x/ALT: While held down, parameters are edited in fine (high resolution) mode with a
V-Pot.

BANK Left/Right
Shifts parameter display by one page in particular view modes.

SINGLE Left/Right
Shifts parameter display by one parameter in particular view modes.

TRACK L/R
In Multi Channel view, TRACK L/R shifts the fader bank left or right by the number of
channel strips in the control surface group. As an example: If you have two C4 units in
a control surface group, the view shifts by 16 channels. Simultaneously pressing TRACK
L or TRACK R and OPTION switches the fader bank to the beginning or end. As an
example, if you are viewing the first eight channels (of 64 Audio Objects) in the fader
bank, pressing OPTION and TRACK L or TRACK R will switch to view the last eight
channels in the fader bank (Audio Objects 57 to 64).
In Channel Strip view, TRACK L/R selects the previous or next track. With SHIFT held
down: as above, but for Split Lower.

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

159

SLOT UP/DOWN
Selects the desired EQ, Send or plug-in insert slot.

Marker Overlay
The Marker overlay is active when the MARKER button light is on.
 V-Select 1 to 30 is assigned to markers 1 to 30. The upper LCD line shows the marker
name; the lower line displays “INSIDE” when the SPL falls between marker
boundaries.
 V-Select 31 creates a new marker.
 V-Select 32 deletes the current marker.

Track Overlay
The Track overlay is active when the TRACK button light is on.
 V-Select 1 to 32 changes the currently edited track. When a track is selected for Split
Upper, the lower LCD line displays the word “UPPER.” If a track is selected for Split
Lower, the word “LOWER” is shown.
To select a track for Split Upper, press the appropriate V-Select.
To select a track for Split Lower, press the V-Select while holding down SHIFT.
 BANK Left/Right shifts the fader bank by the number of channels in the control
surface group.
 SINGLE Left/Right shifts the fader bank by one track.

Channel Strip Overlay
The Channel Strip overlay is active when the CHAN STRIP button light is on.
 V-Pot/V-Select row 1 edits the frequency and gain of EQ bands 3 to 6 (the parametric
bands), provided an EQ plug-in is inserted in the current channel strip.
 V-Pot/V-Select row 2 switches to edit mode for plug-in inserts 1 to 8, provided a
plug-in is inserted in the respective Insert slot. If no plug-in is inserted, turn the
respective V-Pot to select a plug-in, then press V-Select, to instantiate it.
 V-Pot/V-Select row 3 edits Send 1 to 8 Level, provided the current track has active
sends.
 V-Pot/V-Select 25 switches to Instrument Edit mode, provided the selected track is an
Audio Instrument track and an Audio Instrument is inserted.
 V-Pot/V-Select 26 edits track output.
 V-Pot/V-Select 27 sets the automation mode.
 V-Pot/V-Select 28 edits group membership.
 V-Pot/V-Select 29 edits volume.

160

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

Â V-Pot/V-Select 30 edits pan/surround angle (for surround channels).
 V-Pot/V-Select 31 edits Surround Diversity.
 V-Pot/V-Select 32 edits track mode (mono/stereo).

Function Overlay
The Function overlay is active when the FUNCTION button light is on.
Control

Assignment

1 (display: Params)

Enables/Disables the parameter display of the active window.

2 (Channl Strip)

Enables/Disables Channel Strip Only option in Arrange.

3 (Delay in ms)

Activates/Deactivates display of delays in milliseconds.

4 (Ruler: SMPTE)

Activates/Deactivates SMPTE display of time ruler.

5 (Global Track)

Activates/Deactivates display of Global tracks.

6 (Arrang Grid)

Activates/Deactivates display of the grid in Arrange.

7 (Event Float)

Activates/Deactivates display of the floating Event List.

8 (Name/Value)

Switches the display mode between Name and Value (identical to the
NAME/VALUE button on the Logic Control).

9 (Track Autom.)

Enables/Disables display of track automation in Arrange windows.

10 (Trk>Rg Autom.)

Performs Move Current Track Automation Data To Region key command.
With the SHIFT button held down (display: Trk>Ob Au All), Move All
Track Automation Data To Region key command is performed.

11 (Rg>Trk Autom.)

Performs Move Current Region Control Data To Track Automation
function.
With the SHIFT button held down (display: Ob>Trk Au All), Move All
Region Control Data To Track Automation key command is performed.

12 (Clear Autom.)

Performs Delete Currently Visible Automation Data of Current Track key
command. With the SHIFT button held down (display: Clear Au All),
Delete All Automation Data of Current Track function is performed.

13 (ClrAll Overld)

Resets the Level Meter Overload displays.

14 (ClrAll RecRdy)

Switches off Record Ready for all tracks.

15 (ClrAll Solo)

Switches off Solo for all tracks.

16 (ClrAll Mute)

Switches off Mute for all tracks.

17 (Tool: Pointr)

Chooses the Pointer tool.

18 (Tool: Pencil)

Chooses the Pencil tool.

19 (Tool: Scissr)

Chooses the Scissors tool.

20 (Tool: Glue)

Chooses the Glue tool.

21 (Tool: Text)

Chooses the Text tool.

22 (Tool: Xfade)

Chooses the Crossfade tool.

23 (Tool: Marque)

Chooses the Marquee tool.

24 (Tool: Autom.)

Chooses the Automation tool.

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

161

Control

Assignment

V-Pot 25 (WfZoom)

Edits the active Arrange waveform zoom factor.

V-Pot 26 (V.Zoom)

Edits the vertical zoom factor of the active window.

V-Pot 27 (H.Zoom)

Edits the horizontal zoom factor of the active window.

V-Pot 28 (Move Cycle)

Moves the Cycle locators.

V-Pot 29 (Quantz)

Chooses the Quantize Again value. V-Select 29 performs Quantize Again
for the selected Regions or events.

V-Pot 30 (Format)

Chooses the Format value for clock display.

V-Select 31 (Prev SetEXS)

Performs “Next Plug-in Setting or EXS Instrument” key command.

V-Select 32 (Next SetEXS)

Performs “Previous Plug-in Setting or EXS Instrument” key command.

The SHIFT modifier button is currently assigned to V-Selects 10 to 12 (see above). Use of
the OPTION, CTRL or x/ALT modifiers don’t alter V-Select/V-Pot functionality, as they
are unassigned. You can freely assign new key commands to these encoders, or may
choose to reassign the existing assignments in Logic Pro.

162

Chapter 11 Mackie C4

12

Mackie HUI

12

Set Up
Please make sure that your HUI unit(s) are connected bi-directionally with the
computer, using a MIDI interface.
To set up Mackie HUI units:
1 Choose Logic Pro > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose New > Install in the Setup window’s local menu.
3 Select HUI in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.
Logic Pro will scan for, and automatically install, your control surface(s).

Other HUI Compatible Devices
If the unit emulates one HUI unit, proceed as if using a HUI.
If you experience problems in the DSP Edit display, install the unit as a DM2000.
If the unit emulates more than one HUI, add the required number of additional devices
in the Setup window (see the Yamaha digital mixer sections in this document). If the
unit is limited to support of only one HUI DSP edit section, choose HUI Channel Strips
only as the model name for these additional units. This ensures that scrolling in the DSP
edit section is limited to four parameters.
If you wish to know more about button assignments, refer to the Assignment Overview
section below, and the device’s user manual.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

163

ASSIGN Section
Control

Assignment

SEND A

Assigns Send 1 Level to V-Pots, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP V-Pots. While held
down, the scribble strips show the current Send 1 destination assignment.

SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 6
SEND B

Assigns Send 2 Level to V-Pots, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP V-Pots. While held
down, the scribble strips show the current Send 2 destination assignment.

SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 7
SEND C

Assigns Send 3 Level to V-Pots, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP V-Pots. While held
down, the scribble strips show the current Send 3 destination assignment.

SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 8
SEND D

Assigns Send 4 Level to V-Pots, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP V-Pots. While held
down, the scribble strips show the current Send 4 destination assignment.

SEND E

Assigns Send 5 Level to V-Pots, and Send 5 to 8 Levels to DSP V-Pots. While held
down, the scribble strips show the current Send 5 destination assignment.

PAN

Assigns Pan to V-Pots; assigns selected track’s Pan/Surround parameters to DSP VPots.

INPUT

Assigns Track Input to V-Pots. While held down, the scribble strips show the current
Track Input assignment.

OUTPUT

Assigns Track Output to V-Pots. While held down, the scribble strips show the
current Track Output assignment.

REC/RDY ALL

Disable Record Ready on all tracks.

BYPASS

Switches the INSERT buttons between Insert Select and Insert Bypass mode. Also
see Insert entry in Channel Strips table on page 166.

MUTE

Switches the V-Select buttons between Send Position and Send Mute mode.

SHIFT

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

SELECT-ASSIGN

Displays the V-Pot assignment as follows:
Pan, Snd1 to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

SUSPEND

—

DEFAULT

Switches V-Select buttons between normal behavior and setting default value.

ASSIGN

When V-Pots display a Send level, the ASSIGN button switches them to Send
Destination Assignment mode. Press V-Select or ASSIGN button again to confirm
the assignment.

Fader Bank Buttons

164

Control

Assignment

Bank Left

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.

Bank Right

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.

Channel Left

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the left.

Channel Right

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right.

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

WINDOW Section
Control

Assignment

TRANSPORT

Opens/Closes the Transport window.

EDIT

Opens/Closes the Arrange window.

MIX

Opens/Closes the Track Mixer.

ALT

Opens/Closes the Sample Editor.

STATUS

Opens/Closes the Audio window.

MEM-LOC

Opens/Closes the Marker List.

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Section
Control

Assignment

UNDO

Performs Undo.

SHIFT/ADD Performs Redo.
OPTION/ALL Opens Undo History window.
SAVE

Saves the song.

OPTION/ALL Performs Save As function, allowing you to save the song under a different name.
EDIT MODE

—

EDIT TOOL

Selects the next tool. While held down, numerical buttons select a specific tool.

SHIFT/ADD

Shifts to second meaning of some buttons. See descriptions of other buttons.

OPTION/ALL

While held down, value change mode is set to “relative”: relative value changes
result in a minimum, default, or maximum value for the edited parameter. Also see
description of other buttons.

CTRL/CLUTCH

While held down, the Group Clutch is engaged (all groups are disabled).

x/ALT/FINE

While held down, value change mode is set to “fine”: relative value changes work at
maximum resolution. Also see descriptions of other buttons.

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

165

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Level meters

Displays momentary and peak levels.

REC/RDY

Activates/Deactivates Record Enable button.

OPTION/ALL Disables Record Enable button for all tracks.
INSERT

BYPASS button off (see Insert Select mode on page 164): selects track for plug-in
selection.
BYPASS button on (see Insert Bypass mode page 164): enables/disables bypass of
currently selected Insert slot.

V-SEL

PAN button on: sets Pan parameter to center if DEFAULT button is on.
Send 1 to 8 selected: edits Send Pre/Post, activates/deactivates Send Mute or sets
Send Level to default value.
In Send Destination Assignment mode, Track Input (see Input button on page 164)
or Track Output Assignment mode (see Output button on page 164), the V-SEL
buttons confirm the selection.

V-Pot

Adjusts parameter selected in the ASSIGN section.

AUTO

Cycles through automation modes.
With an automation mode button held down, the button sets this automation
mode.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.

OPTION/ALL Disables Solo for all tracks.
MUTE

Enables/Disables Mute.

OPTION/ALL Unmutes all tracks.
Scribble strip

Displays track name, or Send, In, or Out assignment.

SELECT

Selects track.

SHIFT/ADD Sets volume to unity level.

166

DEFAULT

Sets volume to unity level.

Fader

Adjusts volume, or duplicates V-Pot in Flip mode.

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

DSP EDIT/ASSIGN Section
Control

Assignment

ASSIGN

—

COMPARE

Switches DSP display between “track name/parameter name” and “parameter name/
parameter value” modes.

BYPASS

Enables/Disables bypass of currently edited plug-in insert.

DSP Select 1 to
4

Assignment Pan:
 DSP Select 1 centers Pan or Surround Angle.
 DSP Select 2 centers Surround Diversity.
 DSP Select 3 centers Surround LFE.
 DSP Select 4 selects Surround mode.
Assignment Send:
 Activate/Deactivate Sends 1 to 4 or Mutes 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assign mode:
 Confirms insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 plug-in selection, selects this insert and enters
Plug-in Edit mode.
Plug-in Edit mode:
 Sets value to default, or turns parameter “switch” on/off.

DSP V-Pots

Assignment Pan:
 DSP V-Pot 1 controls Pan or Surround Angle.
 DSP V-Pot 2 controls Surround Diversity.
 DSP V-Pot 3 controls Surround LFE.
 DSP V-Pot 4 controls Surround Mode.
Assignment Send:
 Control Send 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Level.
Plug-in Assign mode:
 Assigns plug-in inserts 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
 Controls the selected plug-in parameter.

INSERT/PARAM

Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit modes.

SCROLL

Plug-In Edit mode: shifts parameter display by the number of DSP V-Pots in the
control surface group (usually four).

x/ALT/FINE Plug-in Edit: mode shifts parameter display by one.

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

167

Function Keys
Control

Assignment

F1

Clears Overload LEDs.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables MIDI tracks.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Arrange window.

F2

Recalls Screenset 2.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables Input Objects.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Track Mixer.

F3

Recalls Screenset 3.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables audio tracks.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Event Editor.

F4

Recalls Screenset 4.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables Audio Instrument trackss.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Score Editor.

F5

Recalls Screenset 5.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables Aux Objects.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Hyper Editor.

F6

Recalls Screenset 6.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables Bus Objects.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Matrix Editor.

F7

Switches counter display between SMPTE and bars/beats/format/ticks.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables Outputs and Master Object.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Transport window.

F8/ESC

Default: exits folder.
Goto Marke mode: cancels dialog.

x/ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Audio window.

AUTO ENABLE Section

168

Control

Assignment

FADER

Activates/Deactivates volume automation playback and recording.

PAN

Activates/Deactivates pan automation playback and recording.

PLUG IN

Activates/Deactivates plug-in parameter automation playback and recording.

MUTE

Activates/Deactivates mute automation playback and recording.

SEND

Activates/Deactivates send level automation playback and recording.

SEND MUTE

—

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

AUTO MODE Section
Control

Assignment

READ

Sets selected track to Read automation mode. While held down, the channel strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to Read.

OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Read automation mode.
LATCH

Sets selected track to Latch automation mode. While held down, the channel strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to Latch.

OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to automation mode Latch.
TRIM

—

TOUCH

Sets selected track to Touch automation mode. While held down, the channel strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to Touch.

OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Touch automation mode.
WRITE

Sets selected track to Write automation mode. While held down, the channel strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to Write.

OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Write automation mode.
OFF

Sets selected track to Off automation mode. While held down, the channel strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to Off.

OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Off automation mode.

STATUS/GROUP Section
Control

Assignment

AUTO

While held down, the scribble strips display the tracks’ automation mode.

MONITOR

—

PHASE

—

GROUP

Enters Group Edit mode:
 The upper line in the DSP edit section displays the currently edited group number
and name.
 DSP Select buttons 1 to 4 switch between the properties of the currently edited
group. The group name is shown in the lower line.
 When the INSERT/PARAM button is off, the DSP Edit V-Pots scroll through the
group properties. If the INSERT/PARAM button is on, the DSP EDIT V-Pots select
the group currently being edited.
 The SELECT buttons enable/disable group membership of the track.

SHIFT/ADD Switches to Track View.
CREATE

Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode (see above).

SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View.
SUSPEND

Activates/Deactivates the Group Clutch.

SHIFT/ADD Switches to Arrange View.

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

169

EDIT Section
Control

Assignment

CAPTURE

—

SEPARATE

—

CUT

Cuts the selection.

COPY

Copies the selection.

PASTE

Pastes the Clipboard contents.

DELETE

Deletes the selection.

Time Display
Control

Assignment

TIME CODE

Lit if counter displays time code.

FEET

Not assigned.

BEATS

Lit if counter displays bars/beats/format/ticks.

Time display

Displays time code or bars/beats/format/ticks.

RUDE SOLO
LIGHT

Flashes if any track is soloed.

LOCATE/NUMERICS Section
Control

Assignment

CLR

Deletes current marker.

=

Creates a marker at the current song position.

/

Equivalent to computer keyboard / key.

*

Equivalent to computer keyboard * key.

–

Equivalent to computer keyboard – key.

+

Equivalent to computer keyboard + key.

0 to 9

Normal: 1 to 9 recalls markers 1 to 9.
If in Goto Marker dialog: Equivalent to computer keyboard keys 0 to 9.

SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables:
1: MIDI tracks
2: Input Objects
3: Audio tracks
4: Audio Instrument Objects
5: Aux Objects
6: Bus Objects
7: Outputs and Master Object

170

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

Control

Assignment

EDIT TOOL Selects tool:
1: Pointer
2: Pencil
3: Eraser
4: Text tool
5: Scissors
6: Glue
7: Solo tool
8: Mute tool
9: Magnifying Glass
0

If in Goto Marker dialog: Equivalent to computer keyboard 0 key.

.

If not in Goto Marker dialog: Enters Goto Marker dialog.
In in Goto Marker dialog: Confirms entered marker number.

ENTER

If not in Goto Marker dialog: Enters folder of selected track.
If in Goto Marker dialog: Confirms entered marker number.

Transport Section
Control

Assignment

AUDITION

—

PRE

Sets left locator.

IN

Sets Drop In locator.

OUT

Sets Drop Out locator.

POST

Sets right locator.

RTZ

Goes to the left locator.

END

Goes to the right locator.

ON LINE

Switches between internal/external sync.

LOOP

Enables/Disables Cycle mode.

QUICK PUNCH

Enables/Disables Drop mode.

REWIND

Shuttles backward.

FAST FWD

Shuttles forward.

STOP

Stop playback.

PLAY

Starts playback.
SHIFT/ADD Pause

RECORD

Record

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

171

Cursor Buttons
Control

Assignment

Cursor Up

Cursor mode: Equivalent to computer keyboard Up Arrow key.
Zoom mode: Zooms out vertically.

SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: Individual track zoom in.
x/ALT/FINE Page up
OPTION/ALL + Scroll to top.
x/ALT/FINE
Cursor Down

Cursor mode: Equivalent to computer keyboard Down Arrow key.
Zoom mode: Zooms out vertically.

SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: Individual track zoom out.
x/ALT/FINE Page down
OPTION/ALL + Scroll to bottom.
x/ALT/FINE
Cursor Left

Cursor mode: Equivalent to computer keyboard Left Arrow key.
Zoom mode: Zooms out horizontally.

SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: Individual track zoom reset of tracks from the same class.
x/ALT/FINE Page left
OPTION/ALL + Scroll to left border.
x/ALT/FINE
Cursor Right

Cursor mode: Equivalent to computer keyboard Right Arrow key.
Zoom mode: Zooms in horizontally.

SHIFT/ADD Zoom mode: Individual track zoom reset of all tracks.
x/ALT/FINE Page right
OPTION/ALL + Scroll to right border.
x/ALT/FINE
MODE

Switches between Cursor and Zoom modes.

Jog Wheel
Control

Assignment

Jog Wheel

Default: Move SPL by one bar.
Scrub button lit: Scrub mode.
Shuttle button lit: Shuttle mode.

SCRUB

Activates/Deactivates Scrub mode.

SHUTTLE

Activates/Deactivates Shuttle mode.

Foot Switches
Control

172

Assignment

Foot Switch 1

Play or Stop

Foot Switch 2

Record On/Off

Chapter 12 Mackie HUI

13

Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

13

Set Up
Please make sure that your control surface is connected bi-directionally with the
computer, either using a MIDI interface or the built-in USB connector. If the unit(s) are
connected via USB, ensure that the MIDI driver shipped with the unit is installed.
To set up SAC-2K units:
1 Choose Logic > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Setup.
2 Choose New > Install in the Setup window’s local menu.
3 Select the SAC-2K in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

LCDs and Encoders
Control

Assignment

Left and middle LCDs

Upper row displays track number (if in a Multi Channel View) or parameter
name (if in a Channel Strip View).
Lower row shows the parameter value of the encoder below the display.
Level meters are displayed to the right.

Right LCD

Upper row displays the name of the parameter edited with the encoder
below.
Lower row displays the parameter value assigned to the encoder below the
display.
The Master Output level meter is displayed at the far right.

Encoders

Edit the corresponding parameter displayed in the LCD.

Encoder push buttons

Parameters with two values (On/Off ): Switches between the two values.
Parameters that access items (plug-in selection): Confirms preselection.
At other times: Sets parameter to default value.

173

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Mute/Solo

Switches Mute/Solo 1 to 8 buttons between Mute and Solo modes.
LED off: Mute/Solo buttons switch Mute state on/off.
LED on: Mute/Solo buttons switch Solo state on/off.
LED flashes: Mute/Solo buttons switch Rec/Rdy state on/off.
SHIFT Sets Mute/Solo buttons to Rec/Rdy mode.

Mute/Solo 1 to 8

Mute/Solo LED off: Enables/Disables Mute; LED displays Mute status.
Mute/Solo LED on: Enables/Disables Solo; LED displays Solo status.
Mute/Solo LED flashing: Enables/Disables Rec/Rdy; LED displays Rec/Rdy
status.

SELECT 1 to 8 buttons

Selects track.
Exception: In Group mode, these buttons define group membership of the
track.

Master Select button

Switches Flip mode between Off and Duplicate.

Fader 1 to 8

Controls volume, or duplicates encoder above if Flip mode is enabled. The
silk screened legend lines are scaled as follows: +6 dB, +3 dB, 0 dB, −5 dB,
−10 dB, −15 dB, −20 dB, −25 dB, −30 dB, −35 dB, −40 dB, −45 dB, −50 dB, −60
dB, −inf.

Master Fader

Controls master volume.

Mixe Mode Section

174

Control

Assignment

Pan

Switches to multi-channel pan editing.
Encoders 9 to 12 edit Pan/Angle, Diversity, LFE, and Surround Mode of
selected track (in Surround mode).

High, HiMid, LowMid,
Low

Switches to multi-channel gain editing of a certain EQ band. Encoders 9 to
12 edit Frequency, Gain, Q factor, and On/Off for the selected track.
Pressing and releasing the button chooses a specific EQ band.
 Low: Band 3 (first parametric EQ band)
 LowMid: Band 4 (second parametric EQ band)
 HiMid: Band 5 (third parametric EQ band)
 High: Band 6 (fourth parametric EQ band)
While held down, Encoder 9 lets you choose the EQ band to edit (bands 1 to
8).
The button’s LED is lit when in multi-channel gain editing mode of the
button’s EQ band.

Snd/Ins

Switches the four Snd/Ins (1 to 4) buttons between Send and Insert modes.
 LED off: Send mode
 LED on: Insert mode

Chapter 13 Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

Control

Assignment

Snd/Ins 1 to 4

 If in Send mode, switches to multi-channel send level editing of Sends 1 to
4.
Encoders 9 to 12 edit Destination, Level, Pre/Post and Mute of the selected
track. Destination must be confirmed by encoder 9’s push-button.
While held down, Encoder 9 selects the desired Send number (1 to 8).
The button’s LED is lit when in multi-channel send level editing mode of
the button’s send number.
 If in Insert mode, switches to multi-channel plug-in selection for Inserts 1
to 4. Plug-in selection is confirmed by the encoder’s push-button.
While held down, Encoder 9 enables you to choose the desired Insert
number (1 to 15).
The button’s LED is lit when in plug-in selection mode (of the
corresponding button’s insert number).

Audio

Switches to Global View and displays audio tracks.
SHIFT Switches to Mixer View.

MIDI

Switches to Global View and displays MIDI tracks.
SHIFT Switches to Arrange View.

Input

Switches to Global View and displays Input Objects.
SHIFT Switches to Global View and displays Outputs and Master Object.

Inst

Switches to Global View and displays Audio Instrument Objects.
SHIFT Switches to Global View and displays Aux Objects.

Bus

Switches to Global View and displays Bus Objects.
SHIFT Switches to Global View and displays folders and all tracks shown when the
View > Other Tracks option is activated in the Track Mixer.

Group

Switches to Group editing:
 Encoder 1 to 10 push buttons edit a group property (Property shown in
the LCD’s lower line).
 Encoder 11 scrolls through group properties.
 Encoder 12 selects a group to edit. Its name is displayed in the lower line,
above Encoder 12.
 Select buttons 1 to 8 activate/deactivate track membership within the
group.

1 to 8

Shifts the fader bank offset to the left by one bank.

9 to 16

Shifts the fader bank offset to the right by one bank.

17 to 24

Shifts the fader bank offset to the left by one track.

25 to 32

Shifts the fader bank offset to the right by one track.

Chapter 13 Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

175

Software Navigation Section
Control

Assignment

1

Num LED off: —
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘1’ on computer keyboard.

2

Num LED off: Equivalent to Left Arrow key on computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘2’ on computer keyboard.

3

Num LED off: Equivalent to Up Arrow key on computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘3’ on computer keyboard.

4

Num LED off: Eequivalent to Right Arrow key on computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘4’ on computer keyboard.

5

Num LED off: Performs Undo.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘5’ on computer keyboard.

6

Num LED off: —
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘6’ on computer keyboard.

7

Num LED off: Copies the selection.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘7’ on computer keyboard.

8

Num LED off: Equivalent to Down Arrow key on computer keyboard.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘8’ on computer keyboard.

9

Num LED off: Pastes the Clipboard contents.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘9’ on computer keyboard.

0

Num LED off: Saves the song.
Num LED on: Equivalent to ‘0’ on computer keyboard.

Num

Switches the numeric buttons between primary and secondary function (see
above).

Enter

Equivalent to Enter key on the computer keyboard.

Locator Section
The locator displays the current song position in bars/beats format, as defined in the
song settings. The spaces between the sections are replaced with a period, as the bars/
beats format uses up to 14 characters in Logic, and the SAC display is limited to eight
digits.

176

Chapter 13 Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

Marker Section
Control

Assignment

SHIFT

Shifts to secondary function of other buttons.

Scrub

Rotates thru the three modes for the Jog Wheel:
 LED off: Move SPL by one bar.
 LED on: Activates Scrub mode.
 LED flashes: Activates Shuttle mode.

From

Sets left locator to current SPL.
SHIFT Sets SPL to left locator.

Store Marker

Creates a marker at the current SPL.
SHIFT Deletes marker at the current SPL.

To

Sets right locator to current SPL.
SHIFT Sets SPL to right locator.

Recall Marker

Opens the Goto Marker dialog.
SHIFT Opens the Marker List.

Jog Wheel

Moves the SPL in one of three modes, depending on the state of the Scrub
button (see above).

Transport Section
Control

Assignment

<<

Shuttles backward.
SHIFT Goes to previous marker.

>>

Shuttles forward.
SHIFT Goes to next marker.

STOP
PLAY

Stops playback.
Starts playback.
SHIFT Enables/Disables Cycle mode.

RECORD

Record
SHIFT Enables/Disables Replace mode.

Chapter 13 Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

177

Channel Strips Section
Control

Assignment

EQs

Enters Channel Strip EQ editing mode. Pressing the button again cycles
through the available pages.

Inserts/Sends

Enters Channel Strip plug-in editing mode—edits the currently selected
insert of the selected track. Pressing the button again cycles through the
available pages.

Dynamics

—

MIDI

—

Instrument

Enters Channel Strip instrument editing mode—edits the instrument of the
selected track (if it’s an Audio Instrument track). Pressing the button again
cycles through the available pages.

Troubleshooting
The track names are shorter than necessary, and the assignments don’t work
correctly.
The SAC-2K is in an emulation mode (Logic Control or HUI, for example).
To resolve this issue, simply switch the SAC-2K power off, and then back on.
The faders don’t work, and the locator display shows 00000000.
You have manually switched the SAC-2K to SLAVE mode. This, unfortunately, does not
initialize some settings required for proper communication.
To resolve this issue, simply switch the SAC-2K power off, and then back on.

178

Chapter 13 Radikal Technologies SAC-2K

14

Roland SI-24

14

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Ensure that your SI-24 unit(s) are connected to the RPC card with the (included) blue
cable. This connector provides both digital audio and MIDI connections.
 Make sure that the MIDI driver shipped with the unit is installed.
To scan for your Roland SI-24 unit:
1 Choose Logic > Preferences > Control Surfaces > Setup
2 Choose New > Install in the Setup window’s local menu.
3 Select Roland SI-24 in the Install window.
4 Click the Scan button.
Logic Pro will scan for, and automatically install, your control surfaces.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

EQ ON/OFF 1
to 4

In Pan mode:
 Switches bypass state of EQ bands 1–4.
 Enters EQ/Send mode. If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected
track, a Channel EQ will automatically be inserted.
In EQ/Send mode:
 Switches bypass state of EQ bands 1–4. The button LED is lit when the EQ is
enabled.
In Plug-in mode:
 Switches to insert 1–4. The lit button LED indicates the selected insert.
 If a Plug-in window is open, it will also switch to the selected insert.

SHIFT In EQ/Send mode: Enables/Disables Send 1–4 Mute.

179

Control

Assignment

EQ/SEND

Switches track edit section between:
 EQ/Send mode (LED on).
 Pan mode (LED off ).

PLUG-IN

Switches track edit section between:
 Plug-in mode (LED on) (Plug-in window opens.)
 Pan mode (LED off )
Plug-in window closes when Plug-in mode is exited.
SHIFT Switches track edit section between:
 Instrument mode (LED on) (Instrument window opens.)
 Pan mode (LED off )
Instrument editor window closes when Instrument mode is exited.

PAN 1 to 12

In Pan mode:
 Controls channel strip’s Pan (surround angle for tracks in surround mode).
In EQ/Send mode:
 1/3/5/7: EQ 1–4 Gain.
 2/4/6/8: EQ 1–4 Frequency.
 9–12: Send 1–4 Level.
In Plug-in mode:
 1–10: Edits plug-in parameter.
 11: Bypasses plug-in.
 12: Shifts plug-in parameter page.
In Instrument mode:
 1–10: Edits Instrument parameter.
 11: Bypasses Instrument.
 12: Shifts Instrument parameter page.

SHIFT In EQ/Send mode:
 1/3/5/7: EQ 1–4 Type
 2/4/6/8: EQ 1–4 Q factor.
 9–12: Send 1–4 destination.
CH SELECT 1 to Selects track/channel.
12

180

STATUS 1 to 12

In Automation mode: Switches Automation mode between:
 Off (LED off )
 Read (green)
 Latch (orange)
 Write (red)
In Record Ready mode: Enables/Disables Record Ready.
In Solo mode: Enables/Disables Solo.
In Mute mode: Enables/Disables Mute.

Fader 1 to 12

Controls volume.

Chapter 14 Roland SI-24

STATUS MODE Section
Control

Assignment

AUTOMIX

Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Automation mode.
SHIFT Sets all tracks to Off, Read, Latch, or Write (cycles through) automation mode.

REC/PLAY

Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Record Ready mode.

SOLO

Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Solo mode.

MUTE

Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Mute mode.

CH ASSIGN Controls
Control

Assignment

INPUT

Shows the first 12 audio inputs (Global View) on channel strips.
SHIFT Shows the first 12 MIDI channels (Global View) on channel strips.

OUTPUT

Shows the first 12 audio outputs (Global View) on channel strips:
 1: Output 1–2 (front).
 2: Output 3–4 (rear).
 3: Output 5 (center).
 4: Output 6 (LFE).
 5: Output 7–8 (digital out).
SHIFT Shows the first 12 audio channels (Global View) on channel strips.

BUS

Shows the first 12 audio buses (Global View) on channel strips.
SHIFT Shows the first 12 Audio Instruments (Global View) on channel strips.

Tr 1 to 12

Shows tracks 1 to 12 (Track View) on channel strips.

Tr 13 to 24

Shows tracks 13 to 24 (Track View) on channel strips.

MASTER Section
Control

Assignment

Master Fader

Controls output 1-2 volume.

SURROUND PAN Section
Control

Assignment

ON/OFF

Switches selected track’s output between:
 Surround (LED on) and
 Out 1-2 (LED off ).
Also shows/hides the Surround Pan window.

Joystick

Surround X/Y of selected track.

Chapter 14 Roland SI-24

181

Numeric Key Section
Control

Assignment

SYSTEM

Switches SI-24 to System mode. See SI-24 user manual for details.

LOCATE

Switches numeric keys to Locate mode.

SHORT CUT

Switches numeric keys to Shortcut mode.

SCREEN SET

Switches numeric keys to Screenset mode.

0 to 9

System mode: See SI-24 user manual.
Locate mode:
 1 to 9: Goes to markers 1 to 9.
 0: Creates marker at SPL.
Shortcut mode:
 1: Saves song. LED is lit if song has changed since last save.
 2: Performs undo. LED is on if Redo is possible.
 3: Copies the selection.
 4: Pastes the Clipboard contents.
 5: Deletes the selection.
 6: Enables/Disables Scrub mode. LED is on if Scrub mode is enabled.
 7: Enables/Disables Cycle mode. LED is on if Cycle mode is enabled.
 8: Enables/Disables Drop mode. LED is on if Drop mode is enabled.
 9: Switches Arrange window to volume automation view.
 0: Switches Arrange window to pan automation view.
Screenset mode:
 1 to 9: Recall Screensets 1 to 9.
 0: Enables/Disables Lock Screenset.
SHIFT Locate mode:
 1 to 9: Goes to Markers 10 to 18.
 0: Deletes marker at SPL.
Shortcut mode:
 1: Performs Save As.
 2: Performs Redo.
 3: Cuts selection.
 4: Pastes the Clipboard contents.
Screenset mode:
 1: Opens/Closes Arrange window.
 2: Opens/Closes Track Mixer.
 3: Opens/Closes Event Editor.
 4: Opens/Closes Score Editor.
 5: Opens/Closes Hyper Editor.
 6: Opens/Closes Matrix Editor.
 7: Opens/Closes Transport window.
 8: Opens/Closes Audio window.
 9: Opens/Closes Sample Editor.

182

Chapter 14 Roland SI-24

Transport Section
Control

Assignment

PAUSE

Pause

REW

Rewinds SPL by one bar.

F FWD

Advances SPL by one bar.

STOP

Stops playback.

PLAY

Starts playback.

RECORD

Record

Jog wheel

Scrub mode off: Moves SPL by bars.
Scrub mode on: Scrubs audio.

Chapter 14 Roland SI-24

183

15

Tascam FW-1884

15

Introduction
Logic Pro 7 supports the Tascam FW-1884, FE-8 extension and the FW-1082.
Version 1.10 of the plug-in also supports the SoftLCD application which displays
information on track names, parameter assignments and the current value of the
encoders. SoftLCD displays the tracks’ current automation mode while one of the
automation mode buttons is held down. The corresponding encoder edits the
parameter.
Alerts are displayed in SoftLCD. Select buttons allow you to remotely-control alert
buttons.
The following text referring to the FW-1884 also applies to FE-8 and FW-1082, except
where mentioned explicitly.

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro.
 Ensure that the FW-1884’s MIDI driver is installed. See the FW-1884 documentation
for details.
 Connect the FW-1884 to your computer with the supplied FireWire cable.
 Boot Logic Pro. The FW-1884 is installed automatically.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.
Note: The FE-8 units only offer the Channel Strip section, so other facilities mentioned
here don’t apply. The FW-1884 ENCODERS section does, however, apply to the FE-8
channel strips.
The FW-1082 has no channel encoders, and offers an extended channel strip section.

185

ENCODERS Section (FW-1884 only)
Control

Assignment

FLIP

Switches Flip mode between Off and Swap.

PAN

Assigns Pan to encoders.

AUX 1

Assigns Send 1 level to encoders.

AUX 2

Assigns Send 2 level to encoders.

AUX 3

Assigns Send 3 level to encoders.

AUX 4

Assigns Send 4 level to encoders.

AUX 5

Assigns Send 5 level to encoders.

AUX 6

Assigns Send 6 level to encoders.

AUX 7

Assigns Send 7 level to encoders.

AUX 8

Assigns Send 8 level to encoders.

SHORTCUTS Section (FW-1884 only).
Control

Assignment

SAVE/F1

Saves the active song; The button’s LED is lit when the song has been edited.

REVERT/F2

Reverts the active song to the saved version.

ALL SAFE/F3

Disables Record Enable button for all tracks.

CLR SOLO/F4

Switches Solo off on all tracks.
SHIFT Switches Mute off on all tracks.

MARKERS/F5

Creates a new marker at the current SPL.
SHIFT Deletes the marker at the SPL.

LOOP/F6

Enables/Disables Cycle mode.

CUT

Cuts the current selection and places it in the Clipboard.

DEL

Deletes the current selection.

COPY

Copies the current selection to the Clipboard.

PASTE

Pastes the Clipboard contents to the current SPL.

ALT/CMD

Modifier for other buttons.

UNDO

Performs Undo; The button’s LED is lit when Redo is possible.
SHIFT Performs Redo.

186

SHIFT

Modifier for other buttons.

CTRL

Modifier for other buttons.

Chapter 15 Tascam FW-1884

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

REC LEDs

These LEDs are lit when the corresponding track is recording. The LEDs flash
when the track is in Record Ready mode (armed).

SEL

Selects the track.
SHIFT Enables/Disables Send mute, when encoders are controlling a Send level.
READ Sets the track’s automation mode to Read.
WRITE Sets the track’s automation mode to Write.
TCH Sets the track’s automation mode to Touch.
LATCH Sets the track’s automation mode to Latch.

SOLO

Enables/Disables the Solo status of the track.
SHIFT Disables Solo status for all tracks (new for plug-in version 1.20).

MUTE

Enables/Disables the Mute status of the track.
SHIFT Disables Mute status for all tracks (new for plug-in version 1.20).

Encoder

Controls parameter chosen with the ENCODERS section.
SET When encoders control a Send’s level, this combination sets the Send
destination.

Fader

Controls volume of the track.

EQ Section (FW-1884 only)
The EQ controls apply to a certain EQ band of the selected track. A Channel or Linear
Phase EQ will be automatically inserted in the track, if not already present.
Mode

Assignment

REC

While held down, the SEL buttons in the channel strips enable/disable the
track’s Record Enable button.

GAIN

Edits Gain of currently selected EQ band.
SET Selects track input.

FREQ

Edits Frequency parameter of currently selected EQ band.
SET Selects Track output.

Q

Edits Q Factor of currently selected EQ band.
SET Selects Track mode (mono/stereo).

HIGH

Selects EQ band 6.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 8.
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 6 (new in plug-in version 1.20).

HI-MID

Selects EQ band 5.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 7.
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 7 (new in plug-in version 1.20).

LOW-MID

Selects EQ band 4.

Chapter 15 Tascam FW-1884

187

Mode

Assignment
SHIFT Selects EQ band 2.
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 3 (new in plug-in version 1.20).

LOW

Selects EQ band 3.
SHIFT Selects EQ band 1.
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 3 (new in plug-in version 1.20).

Encoders and Controls Section (FW-1082 only)
The three buttons at the bottom of this section define the mode of the other controls:
 EQ/Pan mode: The controls apply to a certain EQ band of the selected track.
 AUX 1–4 mode: The controls apply to Sends 1–4.
 AUX 5–8 mode: The controls apply to Sends 5–8.
Mode

Assignment

REC

While held down, the SEL buttons in the channel strips enable/disable the
track’s Record Enable button status.

EQ GAIN–AUX 1/5

• EQ/PAN mode: edits Gain of currently selected EQ band.
• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send 1 level.
• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send 5 level.

SET Selects Track input.
EQ FREQ–AUX 2/6

• EQ/PAN mode: edits Frequency of currently selected EQ band.
• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send 2 level.
• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send 6 level.

SET Selects Track output.
EQ Q–AUX 3/7

• EQ/PAN mode: edits Q Factor of currently selected EQ band.
• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send 3 level.
• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send 7 level.
SET Selects Track mode.

PAN–AUX 4/8

• EQ/PAN mode: edits Pan.
• AUX 1–4 mode: controls Send 4 level.
• AUX 5–8 mode: controls Send 8 level.

EQ HI–AUX 1/5

• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 6.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 1 Mute on/off.
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 5 Mute on/off.
SHIFT • EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 8.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 1 Position (pre/post.)
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 5 Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 6.

EQ HI MID–AUX 2/6

188

• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 5.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 2 Mute on/off.
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 6 Mute on/off.

Chapter 15 Tascam FW-1884

Mode

Assignment
SHIFT • EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 7.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 2 Position (pre/post).
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 6 Position (pre/post).
REC Switchess bypass state of EQ band 5.

EQ LO MID–AUX 3/7

• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 4.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 3 Mute on/off.
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 7 Mute on/off.

SHIFT • EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 2.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 3 Position (pre/post).
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 7 Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 4.
EQ LOW–AUX 4/8

• EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 3.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 4 Mute on/off.
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 8 Mute on/off

SHIFT • EQ/PAN mode: selects EQ band 1.
• AUX 1–4 mode: switches Send 4 Position (pre/post).
• AUX 5–8 mode: switches Send 8 Position (pre/post).
REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 3.
EQ/PAN

Chooses EQ/PAN mode.
SHIFT Enables/Disables Flip mode; With Flip mode enabled, the faders control Pan.

AUX 1–4

Chooses AUX 1–4 mode.

AUX 5–8

Chooses AUX 5–8 mode.

MASTER Fader
This fader always controls the master volume. If no Master Object exists in the
Environment, it controls Output 1/2.

Automation/Clock Rate Section (FW-1884 only)
Control

Assignment

READ

While held down, SEL buttons are on if a track is in Read automation mode.
Pressing the SEL button sets Read mode. Turning the encoder also edits the
automation mode.

WRITE

While held down, SEL buttons are on if a track is in Write automation mode.
Pressing the SEL button sets Write mode. Turning the encoder also edits the
automation mode.

TCH

While held down, SEL buttons are on if a track is in Touch automation mode.
Pressing the SEL button sets Touch mode. Turning the encoder also edits the
automation mode.

LATCH

While held down, SEL buttons are on if a track is in Latch automation mode.
Pressing the SEL button sets Latch mode. Turning the encoder also edits the
automation mode.

Chapter 15 Tascam FW-1884

189

Control

Assignment

F7

Switches encoders to editing of pan/surround parameters on selected
track: angle, radius, LFE, surround mode, X, Y.

F8

Switches encoders to EQ editing on selected track. See upper line on SoftLCD
application for parameter assignment. Cursor left/right shifts the parameter
bank.

F9

Switches encoders to plug-in editing on selected track. Cursor left/right shifts
parameter bank; Cursor up/down chooses insert to edit.

F10

Switches encoders to instrument editing on selected track. Cursor left/right
shifts parameter bank.

Mode Controls Section (FW-1082 only)
Control

Assignment

F1

Saves the active song; The button’s LED is lit if the song has been edited.
SHIFT Opens the Save As dialog.

F2

Performs Undo; The button’s LED is lit when Redo is possible.
SHIFT Performs Redo.

F3

Copies the current selection to the Clipboard.
SHIFT Cuts the current selection and places it in the Clipboard.

F4

Pastes the Clipboard contents.
SHIFT Clears the current selection.

Master Section
Control

Assignment

Cursor buttons

Identical to computer keyboard’s Arrow keys—except when encoders are in
EQ, Plug-in or Instrument Edit modes (see above).
SHIFT Zoom in and out horizontally or vertically.

SHTL

Enables Shuttle mode for wheel.

Wheel

Shuttle mode off: moves SPL by bar.
Shuttle mode on: shuttles SPL.

Bank LEDs

Show currently selected fader bank. If you only have an FW-1884, a bank refers
to eight tracks. If you have FE-8 extensions added, a bank means the entire
number of channel strips: 16, 24, and so on.
If no LED is lit, a bank higher than 4 is selected.

< BANK

Shifts fader bank down by one bank.
SHIFT Shifts fader bank down by one track.
SET Switches to Track view (new in plug-in version 1.20).

BANK >

Shifts fader bank up by one bank.
SHIFT Shifts fader bank up by one track.
SET Switches to Global view and shows Aux, Bus, and Output Objects (new in plugin version 1.20).

190

Chapter 15 Tascam FW-1884

Control

Assignment

<< LOCATE

Goes to previous marker.
SET Deletes the current marker (new in plug-in version 1.20).

LOCATE >>

Goes to next marker.
SET Creates a new marker at the SPL (new in plug-in version 1.20).

NUDGE buttons

Nudge the selected event/Region left or right (by the current nudge value).
SET Chooses the current nudge value: tick, format, denominator, bar, frame, 1/2
frame.

SET

Modifier for other buttons.

IN

Goes to left locator.
SET Sets left locator to SPL.
SHIFT Sets Drop In locator to SPL.

OUT

Goes to right locator.
SET Sets right locator to current SPL.
SHIFT Sets Drop Out locator to SPL.

REW

Shuttle Rewind key command.

FFWD

Shuttle Forward key command.

STOP

Stops playback.

PLAY

Starts playback.

REC

Record key command.

Chapter 15 Tascam FW-1884

191

16

Tascam US-2400

16

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Make sure that your US-2400 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB.
 Ensure that the US-2400 is in native mode. Please consult your US-2400 manual for
more information on this.
 Launch Logic Pro 7. Your control surface(s) will be scanned for, and installed,
automatically.
Special Note
The US-2400 is capable of running in both “native” and Logic Control emulation modes.
If the unit is set up in Logic Control emulation mode, and the native support plug-in is
installed in the Logic Pro 7 program bundle, Logic will detect both a US-2400 native
control surface and a Logic Control plus two Extender (XT) units.
If you wish to run the US-2400 in Logic Control mode, you may find it most convenient
to remove the US-2400 plug-in from the Logic Pro 7 application bundle. Logic will then
detect a Logic Control plus two Extender (XT) units (the appropriate setup for the US2400 in Logic Control emulation mode), when you scan your control surfaces.
The Logic/Mackie Control differs in button layout to the Tascam US-2400. When
running the Tascam US-2400 in Logic Control mode, certain controllers are not
accessible (the Joystick, as an example). Given these restrictions, it’s not recommended
that the Tascam US-2400 is used in Logic Control mode with Logic. If you choose to do
so, please refer to the documentation supplied with the Tascam US-2400 for details.

193

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Encoder(s)

CHAN button on: see “Encoder Details” on page 194.
CHAN button flashing: Encoders control Instrument parameters, also see
“Instrument Edit View” on page 197.
PAN button flashing: Encoders control plug-in parameters, also see “Plug-in
Edit View” on page 197.
Other modes: Encoders control the mode’s parameters.
F-KEY Â If you are in Instrument Edit view (CHAN button flashing), pressing the F-Key
enters the Instrument Assignment view: The encoders then choose an
instrument.
 If you are in Plug-in Edit view (PAN button flashing), pressing the F-Key enters
the Plug-in Assignment view: the encoders then choose a plug-in.
 If you are in Send views (AUX button LED flashes) and press the F-Key, the
encoders assign the send’s destination.

SEL buttons

Select tracks.
SHIFT In Pan view: sets volume to Unity (0 dB)
In Send views: switches Send mode pre/post
F-KEY Activates/Deactivates Record Enable buttons.

SOLO button(s)

Enables/Disables Solo.

MUTE button(s)

Enables/Disables Mute.
In Send views with Flip mode enabled: activates/deactivates Send mute.
SHIFT In Send views: activates/deactivates Send mute.

Faders

Control volume.

Encoder Details
In CHAN mode (CHAN button on), the encoders control these parameters on the
selected track:

194

Control

Assignment

Encoder 1 (AUX 1)

Controls Send 1 level.

Encoder 2 (AUX 2)

Controls Send 2 level.

Encoder 3 (AUX 3)

Controls Send 3 level.

Encoder 4 (AUX 4)

Controls Send 4 level.

Encoder 5 (AUX 5)

Controls Send 5 level.

Encoder 6 (AUX 6)

Controls Send 6 level.

Encoder 7

Controls Send 7 level.

Encoder 8

Controls Send 8 level.

Chapter 16 Tascam US-2400

Control

Assignment

Encoder 11 (GAIN 1)

Controls the Gain parameter of band 3, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 12 (FREQ 1)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 3, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 13 (Q 1)

Controls the Q factor of band 3, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 14 (GAIN 2)

Controls the Gain parameter of band 4, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 15 (FREQ 2)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 4, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 16 (Q 2)

Controls the Q factor of band 4, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 17 (GAIN 3)

Controls the Gain parameter of band 5, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 18 (FREQ 3)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 5, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 19 (Q 3)

Controls the Q factor of band 5, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 20 (GAIN 4)

Controls the Gain parameter of band 6, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 21 (FREQ 4)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 5, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 22 (Q 4)

Controls the Q factor of band 5, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 24 (PAN)

Controls Panning.

In CHAN mode, with the SHIFT button held, the encoders control the following
parameters on the selected track:
Control

Assignment

Encoder 1 (AUX 1)

Controls Pan/Surround Angle

Encoder 2 (AUX 2)

Controls Surround Radius.

Encoder 3 (AUX 3)

Controls Surround LFE.

Encoder 4 (AUX 4)

Controls Surround mode.

Encoder 5 (AUX 5)

Controls Surround X.

Encoder 6 (AUX 6)

Controls Surround Y.

Encoder 11 (GAIN 1)

Controls the Slope parameter of band 1, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 12 (FREQ 1)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 1, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 13 (Q 1)

Controls the Q factor of band 1, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 14 (GAIN 2)

Controls the Gain parameter of band 2, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 15 (FREQ 2)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 2, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Chapter 16 Tascam US-2400

195

Control

Assignment

Encoder 16 (Q 2)

Controls the Q factor of band 2, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 17 (GAIN 3)

Controls the Gain parameter of band 7, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 18 (FREQ 3)

Controls the Frequency parameter of band 7, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 19 (Q 3)

Controls the Q factor of band 7, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 20 (GAIN 4)

Controls the Slope parameter of band 8, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is
inserted.

Encoder 21 (FREQ 4)

Controls the Q factor of band 8, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 22 (Q 4)

Controls the Q factor of band 8, if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted.

Encoder 24 (PAN)

Controls Panning.

Master Channel
Control

Assignment

SEL

Selects Master Output track (if Master Output Object exists).

CLR SOLO

Disables Solo for all tracks.
SHIFT Disables Mute for all tracks.
F-KEY Disables Record Enable button for all tracks.

FLIP

Switches Flip mode between Off (LED off ) and Duplicate (LED on).
SHIFT Sets Flip mode to Swap (LED flashing).
F-KEY Sets Flip mode to Zero—fader motors are disabled (LED flashing).

Encoder Assignment Section
This is the standard assignment of these buttons:
Control

Assignment

CHAN

Switches encoders to Channel Strip view (see encoders’ legend)—CHAN
button LED is lit.
F-KEY Switches encoders to Instrument Edit view—CHAN button LED flashes. See
“Instrument Edit View” on page 197 for details.

PAN

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of panning—PAN button LED is lit.
F-KEY Switches encoders to Plug-in Edit view—PAN button LED flashes. See “Plug-in
Edit View” on page 197 for details.

AUX 1

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of Send 1 level.
F-KEY Switches display of Arrange window:
 If Arrange window is open, it will be closed.
 If Arrange window is closed, it will be opened.

AUX 2

196

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of Send 2 level.

Chapter 16 Tascam US-2400

Control

Assignment
F-KEY Switches display of Event List:
 If Event List is open, it will be closed.
 If Event List is closed, it will be opened.

AUX 3

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of Send 3 level.
F-KEY Switches display of Score Editor:
 If Score Editor is open, it will be closed.
 If Score Editor is closed, it will be opened.

AUX 4

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of Send 4 level.
F-KEY Switches display of Audio window:
 If Audio window is open, it will be closed.
 If Audio window is closed, it will be opened.

AUX 5

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of Send 5 level.
F-KEY Switches display of Hyper Editor:
 If Hyper Editor is open, it will be closed.
 If Hyper Editor is closed, it will be opened.

AUX 6

Switches encoders to Multi Channel view of Send 6 level.
F-KEY Switches display of Matrix Editor:
 If Matrix Editor is open, it will be closed.
 If Matrix Editor is closed, it will be opened.

Instrument Edit View
In Instrument Edit view, the following AUX buttons have special assignments:
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Scrolls parameter fader bank left by 24 parameters.

AUX 2

Scrolls parameter fader bank right by 24 parameters.

AUX 4

Enables/Disables Bypass button of the currently edited Instrument.

The AUX button LEDs show the currently selected parameter bank. AUX 2 LED is on if
parameters 25–48 are shown on the encoders.
Plug-in Edit View
In Plug-in Edit view, the following AUX buttons have special assignments:
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Scrolls parameter fader bank left by 24 parameters.

AUX 2

Scrolls parameter fader bank right by 24 parameters.

AUX 3

Increments Insert slot.

AUX 4

Enables/Disables Bypass button of the currently edited plug-in.

AUX 6

Decrements Insert slot.

The AUX button LEDs show the currently selected Insert slot. As an example: AUX 2
LED is on if Insert slot 2 is being edited.

Chapter 16 Tascam US-2400

197

Master Section
Control

Assignment

MTR

Switches encoder LED rings between value controlled by encoder (LED off ),
and level and peak hold meters (LED on). In Level Meter mode, the LED below
the encoder displays signal overloads (clipping).

F-KEY

Modifier key, used to switch the function of other controls (see right-aligned “FKEY” in left column).

NULL

Sets Surround x/y or Panning of selected track to center position—LED is on if
Surround X (or Panning) is centered.
F-KEY Resets overload for level meters.

Jog Wheel

SCRUB off: moves SPL by bars.
SCRUB on: audio scrubbing.
SCRUB flashing: Shuttle mode.

Joystick

Edits Surround x/y or Panning of selected track.

SCRUB

Switches Jog Wheel between “Move SPL by Bars” (LED off ) and audio scrubbing
(LED on).
F-KEY Sets Jog Wheel to Shuttle mode (LED flashes).

BANK –

Shifts fader bank left by one bank—LED is lit if the left-most fader bank has not
been reached.
F-KEY Shifts fader bank left by one track.

BANK +

Shifts fader bank right by one bank—LED is lit if the right-most fader bank has
not been reached.
F-KEY Shifts fader bank right by one track.

IN

Sets Drop In locator to Song Position Line.
SHIFT Navigates to left Cycle locator.
F-KEY Sets left Cycle locator to Song Position Line.

OUT

Sets Drop Out locator to Song Position Line.
SHIFT Navigates to right Cycle locator.
F-KEY Sets right Cycle locator to Song Position Line.

SHIFT

Modifier key, used to switch the function of other controls (see right-aligned
“SHIFT” in left column).

REW

Shuttles backward.
SHIFT Identical to Left Arrow key on computer keyboard.

F FWD

Shuttles forward.
SHIFT Identical to Right Arrow key on computer keyboard.

STOP

Stops playback.
SHIFT Identical to Down Arrow key on computer keyboard.

PLAY

Starts playback.
SHIFT Identical to Up Arrow key on computer keyboard.

RECORD

198

Enables/Disables Record.

Chapter 16 Tascam US-2400

17

Tascam US-428 and US-224

17

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Ensure that your US-428/224 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB.
 Launch Logic, and the unit(s) will be scanned for, and installed, automatically.

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as NULL) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.
Note: The US-224 has only four channel strips, and the EQ section, as well as the Master
section (except the NULL button and data wheel) are not available.

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

MUTE 1 to 8

SOLO LED off: Switches Mute on/off; LED displays Mute status.
SOLO LED on: Switches Solo on/off; LED displays Solo status.

REC 1 to 8 LEDs

Displays Record Ready status.
NULL On if fader is higher than actual volume.

SELECT 1 to 8 LEDs

Displays select status.

NULL On if fader is lower than actual volume.
SELECT 1 to 8 buttons Selects track.
REC Enables/Disables Record Ready status.
Fader 1 to 8

Controls Volume.
NULL Allows you to update the fader position to match the actual volume.

Master fader

Controls master volume (Outputs 1 and 2 if no Master Fader Object is available
in the Environment).

199

EQ Section
Control

Assignment

Gain

Controls gain of currently selected EQ of chosen track.

Freq

Controls frequency of currently selected EQ of chosen track.

Q

Controls Q factor of currently selected EQ of chosen track.

HIGH

Selects EQ band 3 for Gain, Freq, and Q controls.
ASGN Switches EQ band 3 bypass state.

HI-MID

Selects EQ band 4 for Gain, Freq, and Q controls.
ASGN Switches EQ band 4 bypass state.

LO-MID

Selects EQ band 5 for Gain, Freq, and Q controls.
ASGN Switches EQ band 5 bypass state.

LOW

Selects EQ band 6 for Gain, Freq, and Q controls.
ASGN Switches EQ band 6 bypass state.

Master Section Controls
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Switches data wheel between Transport/Scrub mode and Send Level 1.
ASGN Switches Send 1 Mute state.

AUX 2

Switches data wheel between Transport/Scrub mode and Send Level 2.
ASGN Switches Send 2 Mute state.

AUX 3

Switches data wheel between Transport/Scrub mode and Send Level 3.
ASGN Switches Send 3 Mute state.

AUX 4

Switches data wheel between Transport/Scrub mode and Send Level 4.
ASGN Switches Send 4 Mute state.

ASGN

Modifier for function of EQ controls, AUX 1 to 4 buttons, PAN knob and data
wheel.

F1

Enables/Disables Cycle mode.

F2

Enables/Disables Drop mode.

F3

Enables/Disables Scrub mode.

PAN

Controls panning of selected track.
ASGN Selects current track’s input.

NULL

200

Modifier for NULL mode. NULL mode allows you to update the fader positions
to match the actual volume.

Chapter 17 Tascam US-428 and US-224

Control

Assignment

Data wheel

AUX 1 LED on: Controls Send 1 Level of selected track.
AUX 2 LED on: Controls Send 2 Level of selected track.
AUX 3 LED on: Controls Send 3 Level of selected track.
AUX 4 LED on: Controls Send 4 Level of selected track.
F3 LED on: Data wheel is in Scrub mode.
None of the above is lit: Data wheel is in Transport mode and moves the SPL
by bars.
ASGN Selects current track’s output.

LOCATE Section
Control

Assignment

<< LOCATE

Goes to previous marker.

LOCATE >>

Goes to next marker.

SET

Creates a new marker at the current SPL.

BANK Section
Control

Assignment

< BANK

Shifts fader bank left by one bank. The LED is lit if the left-most fader bank has
not been reached.

BANK >

Shifts fader bank right by one bank. The LED is lit if the right-most fader bank
has not been reached.

Transport Section
Control

Assignment

REW

Shuttles backward.

F FWD

Shuttles forward.

STOP

Stops playback.

PLAY

Starts playback.

RECORD

Record

Chapter 17 Tascam US-428 and US-224

201

18

Yamaha 01V96

18

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Make sure that your 01V96 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB.
 Make sure that the MIDI driver shipped with the unit is installed.
Basically, you set up the 01V96 as if you are using it with Pro Tools. See the 01V96 user
manual.
Here are the necessary steps:
1 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] repeatedly until the Setup/MIDI/Host page is visible.
2 Move the cursor to the port parameters: select DAW, then select USB and 1-2.
3 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE].
4 Choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter.
5 Press LAYER [REMOTE].
The unit is installed automatically when Logic Pro is launched. You should see two
01V96 (USB 1–2) icons in the setup window, aligned horizontally.

203

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

DISPLAY ACCESS Section
Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

Hides/shows the Sample Editor.

AUTOMIX

While held, the Channel Strip displays show the automation mode of the
selected tracks.

PAIR/GROUP

Enters Group Edit mode:
 The upper line in the DSP edit section displays the currently edited group
number and name.
 Parameter control push-switch buttons 1 to 4 switch the properties of the
currently edited group. Group name is shown in the lower line.
 When INSERT/PARAM is off, DSP Edit Scroll encoder scrolls through the group
properties. At other times, it selects the group currently being edited.
 The SELECT buttons switch group membership of the track.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Track View.
EFFECT

Hides/shows the Sample Editor.

FADER MODE Section
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Assigns Send 1 Level to encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 Destination
assignment.

DAW SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 6.
AUX 2

Assigns Send 2 Level to encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 2 Destination
assignment.

DAW SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 7.
AUX 3

Assigns Send 3 Level to encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 3 Destination
assignment.

DAW SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 8.

204

AUX 4

Assigns Send 4 Level to encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 4 Destination
assignment.

AUX 5

Assigns Send 5 Level to encoders, and Send 5 to 8 Levels to DSP encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 5 Destination
assignment.

AUX 6

Switches Encoder Push-Switch buttons between normal behavior and setting
default value.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

Control

Assignment

AUX 7

Assigns Pan to encoders; assigns selected track’s pan/surround parameters to
DSP encoders.

AUX 8

Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons when channel strip AUTO button
is off:
 Indicator off: Track selection.
 Indicator on: Insert selection.

HOME

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

LCD Function
Control

Assignment

Left/Right buttons

Plug-in Edit mode: Shifts parameter display by the number of parameters
shown in the control surface group (usually four).

DAW ALT/FINE Plug-in Edit mode: Shifts parameter display by one.
F1

Clears Overload LEDs.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables MIDI tracks.
DAW ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Arrange window.

LCD
The LCD displays different data, depending on the page selected with the F2, F3, and
F4 buttons:
Insert Display Mode
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this mode, the LCD displays
parameter details and you can edit and select plug-ins.
Display

Assignment

TIME CODE option

Active if counter is displaying time code.

FEET

Not assigned.

BEATS option

Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/format/ticks.

Time display

Displays time code or bars/beats/format/ticks.

SELECT ASSIGN

Displays the encoder assignment as follows:
Pan, Snd1 to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

ASSIGN

—

COMPARE

Switches DSP display between “track name/parameter name” and “parameter
name/parameter value” modes.

BYPASS

Switches bypass status of plug-in insert currently being edited.

INSERT/PARAM

Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit modes.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

205

Display

Assignment

Parameter control
1 to 4 push-switch

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 push-switch centers Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 push-switch centers Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 push-switch centers Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 push-switch sets Surround Mode to center.
Assignment Send:
 Enables/Disables Sends 1 to 4 or Mutes 5 to 8.
Plug-in Assign:
 Confirms insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 plug-in selection, selects this insert slot and
enters Plug-in Edit mode.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default, or bi-polar switch to on/off.

Parameter controls

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 controls Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 controls Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 controls Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 controls Surround Mode.
Assignment Send:
 Control Send 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Level.
Plug-in Assign:
 Assigns insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
 Sets value to default.

LCD Channel Page
Control

Assignment

Encoder

Adjusts parameter selected in the FADER MODE section.

Encoder Switch

Pan selected: Sets Pan to center if MATRIX 1 is on.
Send 1 to 8 selected: Edits Send Pre/Post, enables/disables Send Mute or sets
Send Level to default value.
Assignment Send, Input, or Output: Confirms selection.

Selected Channel Section

206

Control

Assignment

Pan controls

Adjusts parameter selected in the FADER MODE section.

SEL

Switches channel strip SEL buttons between track and insert selection.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

Data Entry Section
Control

Assignment

Parameter Wheel

Default: Move SPL by one bar.
Scrub: Scrubbing.
Shuttle: Shuttle mode.

– (DEC)

Default: Exits Folder.
Goto Marker: Cancels dialog.

DAW ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Audio window.
+ (INC)

Enters folder of selected track.

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Level Meters

Display momentary and peak level.

SEL

If AUTO off:
 FADER MODE [AUX 8] off: Selects track.
 FADER MODE [AUX 8] on: Selects track for insert assignment.
If AUTO on:
 Cycles through automation modes. With an automation mode button held
down, sets this automation mode.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Sets volume to unity level.
MATRIX SELECT 1

Sets volume to unity level.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.

DAW OPTION/ALL Disables Solo for all tracks.
ON

Enables/Disables Mute.

DAW OPTION/ALL Unmutes all tracks.
Fader

Adjusts volume, or duplicates encoder in Flip mode.

Stereo Channel Strip
Control

Assignment

SEL

Switches channel strips’ SEL buttons between track and insert selection.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

207

User Defined Keys Section
These keys can be assigned to the following functions:
Control

Assignment

DAW WIN STATUS

Opens/Closes the Audio window.

DAW REC/RDY 1 to 16

Enables/Disables Record Ready.

DAW WIN TRANSPORT

Opens/Closes the Transport window.

DAW BANK–

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.

DAW BANK+

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.

DAW SHIFT/ADD

Shifts to second meaning of some buttons. See descriptions of other
buttons.

DAW OPTION/ALL

While held down, value change mode is set to “relative”: relative value
changes result in a minimum, default, or maximum value for the edited
parameter. Also see description of other buttons.

DAW GROUP STATUS

Enters Group Edit mode:
 The upper line in the DSP edit section displays the currently edited group
number and name.
 Parameter control push-switch buttons 1 to 4 switch between properties
of the currently edited group. Group name is shown in the lower line.
 When INSERT/PARAM is off, DSP Edit Scroll Encoder scrolls through the
group properties. At other times, it selects the group currently being
edited.
 The SELECT buttons enable/disable group membership of the track.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Track View.
DAW SUSPEND

Enables/Disables the Group Clutch.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Extended Track View.
DAW CREATE GROUP

Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode (see above).

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View.
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT

Switches between the Arrange and Track Mixer windows.

DAW CHANNEL –

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the left.

DAW CHANNEL+

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right.

DAW CTRL/CLUTCH

While held down, the Group Clutch is engaged (all groups are disabled).

DAW ALT/FINE

While held down, value change mode is set to “fine”: relative value
changes work at maximum resolution. Also see description of other
buttons.

DAW MONI STATUS

—

DAW UNDO

Performs Undo.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Performs Redo.
DAW OPTION/ALL Opens Undo History window.

208

DAW SAVE

Saves the song.

DAW WIN MEM-LOC

Opens/Closes the Marker List.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

Control

Assignment

DAW OPTION/ALL Performs Save As and allows saving the song under a different name.
DAW EDIT TOOL

Selects the next tool. While held, numerical buttons select a specific tool.

DAW WIN INSERT

Opens/Closes the Sample Editor.

DAW REC/RDY ALL

Disable Record Ready on all tracks.

DAW SCRUB

Enables/Disables Scrub mode.

DAW SHUTTLE

Enables/Disables Shuttle mode.

DAW REW

Shuttles backward.

DAW FF

Shuttles forward.

DAW STOP

Stop

DAW PLAY

Play

DAW SHIFT/ADD Pause
DAW REC

Record

DAW PRE

Sets left locator.

DAW IN

Sets Drop In locator.

DAW OUT

Sets Drop Out locator.

DAW POST

Sets right locator.

DAW RTZ

Goes to the left locator.

DAW END

Goes to the right locator.

DAW ONLINE

Enables/Disables internal/external sync.

DAW QUICK PUNCH

Enables/Disables Drop mode.

DAW AUTO FADER

Enables/Disables Volume automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO PAN

Enables/Disables Pan automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO PLUGIN

Enables/Disables Plug-in parameter automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO MUTE

Enables/Disables Mute automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO SEND

Enables/Disables Send Level automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO SEND MUTE

—

DAW AUTO WRITE

Sets selected track to Write automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to Write.

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Write automation mode.
DAW AUTO TOUCH

Sets selected track to Touch automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to Touch.

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Touch automation mode.
DAW AUTO LATCH

Sets selected track to Latch automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to Latch.

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Latch automation mode.
DAW AUTO READ

Sets selected track to Read automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to Read.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

209

Control

Assignment

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Read automation mode.
DAW AUTO TRIM

—

DAW AUTO OFF

Sets selected track to Off automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to Off.

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to Off automation mode.
DAW AUTO STATUS

210

While held down, the Channel Strip displays show the automation mode of
the selected track.

Chapter 18 Yamaha 01V96

19

Yamaha 02R96

19

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Make sure that your 02R96 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB.
 Make sure that the MIDI driver shipped with the unit is installed.
On the 02R96 Front Panel:
Basically, you set up the 02R96 as if you are using it with Pro Tools. See the 02R96 user
manual. Here are the necessary steps:
 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] repeatedly until the Setup / MIDI/Host page is visible.
Now move the cursor to the port parameters: select DAW, then select USB and 1-3.
 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE]. Choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter.
 Press LAYER [REMOTE].
In Logic:
The unit is installed automatically when Logic Pro is launched. You should see three
02R96 (USB 1-3) icons in the setup window, aligned horizontally.

211

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

DISPLAY ACCESS Section
Control

Assignment

METER

Clears Overload LEDs.

AUX SELECT Section
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Assigns Send 1 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 destination assignment.

AUX 2

Assigns Send 2 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 2 destination assignment.

AUX 3

Assigns Send 3 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 3 destination assignment.

AUX 4

Assigns Send 4 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 4 destination assignment.

AUX 5

Assigns Send 5 Level to Encoders, and Send 5 to 8 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 5 destination assignment.

ENCODER MODE Section
Control

Assignment

PAN

Assigns Pan to Encoders; assigns selected track’s pan/surround parameters to DSP
Encoders.

AUX

Assigns Send 1 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 destination assignment.

FADER MODE Section

212

Control

Assignment

FADER

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

AUX/MTRX

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

Chapter 19 Yamaha 02R96

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS Section
Control

Assignment

Display

Opens/Closes the Sample Editor window.

PLUG-INS

Switches Encoder Push-Switch buttons between normal behavior and setting default
value.

CHANNEL
INSERTS

Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons:
 Indicator off: track selection.
 Indicator on: Insert selection.

1

—

2

Switches DSP display between “track name/parameter name” and “parameter name/
parameter value” modes.

3

Switches bypass status of currently edited plug-in insert.

4

Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit modes.

Parameter Up
& Parameter
Down

Plug-In Edit: shifts parameter display by the number of parameters shown in the
control surface group (usually four).

Parameter
control 1–4
push-switch

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 push-switch centers Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 push-switch centers Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 push-switch centers Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 push-switch sets Surround Mode to center.
Assignment Send:
 Enables/Disables Sends 1 to 4 or Mutes 5 to 8.
Plug-In Assign:
 Confirm insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 plug-in selection, selects this insert slot and enters
Plug-In Edit mode.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default, or sets bi-polar switch to on/off.

Parameter
controls

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 controls Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 controls Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 controls Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 controls Surround Mode.
Assignment Send:
 Control Send 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Level.
Plug-In Assign:
 Assigns insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default.

Chapter 19 Yamaha 02R96

213

LCD
The LCD displays different data, depending on the page selected with the F2, F3, and
F4 buttons:
 INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT Display Mode: parameter details, plug-in selection or plug-in
parameters. Press [F2] to select this mode.
Display

Assignment

TIME CODE

Active if counter is displaying time code.

FEET

Not assigned.

BEATS

Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/format/ticks.

Time display

Displays time code or bars/beats/format/ticks.

SELECT ASSIGN Displays the Encoder assignment as follows:
Pan, Snd1 to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

 Channel Display Mode: Encoder values and Channel Strip display). Press [F3] to
select this mode.
 level meters. Press [F4] to select this mode.

USER DEFINED KEYS Section

214

Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

While held, the Channel Strip displays show the automation mode of the selected
tracks.

1

Switches between the Arrange and Track Mixer windows.

2

Enables/Disables the Group Clutch.

3

Sets selected track to “Write” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Write.”

4

Sets selected track to “Touch” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Touch.”

5

Sets selected track to “Latch” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Latch.”

6

Sets selected track to “Read” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Read.”

7

—

8

Sets selected track to “Off” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip AUTO
buttons set automation mode to “Off.”

9

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.

10

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.

11

Enables/Disables Volume automation playback and recording.

12

Enables/Disables Mute automation playback and recording.

13

Enables/Disables Pan automation playback and recording.

14

Enables/Disables Send Level automation playback and recording.

Chapter 19 Yamaha 02R96

Control

Assignment

15

—

16

Enables/Disables Plug-in parameter automation playback and recording.

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Encoder

Adjusts parameter selected in the AUX SELECT section.

Encoder PushSwitch

Pan selected: sets Pan to center.
If EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [PLUG-INS] on Sends 1 to 8 selected: edits Send Pre/Post,
switches Send Mute status or sets Send Level to default value.
Send Assign, Input, or Output: confirms selection.

AUTO

Cycles through automation modes.
With an automation mode button held down, sets this automation mode.

SEL

If EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] off: selects track.
If EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] on: chooses track for plug-in selection/
insertion.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.

ON

Enables/Disables Mute.

Fader

Adjusts volume, or duplicates Encoder in Flip mode.

MACHINE CONTROL Section
Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

Opens/Closes the Marker List window.

1 to 8

Recalls markers 1 to 8.

REW

Shuttles backward.

FF

Shuttles forward.

STOP

Stop

PLAY

Play

REC

Record

Data Entry Section
Control

Assignment

SCRUB

Enables/Disables Scrub mode.

SHUTTLE

Enables/Disables Shuttle mode.

Parameter
Wheel

Default: move SPL by one bar.
Scrub: scrubbing.
Shuttle: Shuttle mode.

ENTER

Enters folder of selected track.

DEC

Exits Folder.

Chapter 19 Yamaha 02R96

215

216

Control

Assignment

INC

Switches between Cursor and Zoom modes.

Cursor Up

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard up arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.

Cursor Down

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard down arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.

Cursor Left

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard left arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out horizontally.

Cursor Right

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard right arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms in horizontally.

Chapter 19 Yamaha 02R96

20

Yamaha DM1000

20

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Make sure that your DM1000 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB.
 Make sure that the MIDI driver shipped with the unit is installed.
On the DM1000 Front Panel:
Basically, you set up the DM1000 as if you are using it with Pro Tools. See the DM1000
user manual, section 17. Here are the necessary steps:
 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] repeatedly until the Setup / MIDI/Host page is visible.
Now move the cursor to the port parameters: select DAW, then select USB and 1-2.
 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE], then [F1] (below the LCD). Choose General DAW as the
TARGET parameter.
 Press LAYER [REMOTE 1].
In Logic:
When Logic Pro is launched, the unit is installed automatically. You should see two
DM1000 (USB 1-2) icons in the Setup window, aligned horizontally.

217

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

DISPLAY ACCESS Section
Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

Opens/Closes the Sample Editor window.

AUTOMIX

While held, the Channel Strip displays show the automation mode of the
selected track.

PAIR/GROUP

Enters Group Edit mode:
 The upper line in the DSP edit section displays the currently edited group
number and name.
 Parameter control push-switch buttons 1 to 4 switch between properties
of the currently edited group (name shown in lower line of LCD).
 When INSERT/PARAM is off, DSP Edit Scroll Encoder scrolls through the
group properties. Otherwise, it selects the currently edited group.
 The SELECT buttons enable/disable group membership of the track.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Track View.
METER

Clears Overload LEDs.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables MIDI Tracks.
DAW ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Arrange window.

EFFECT

Opens/Closes the Sample Editor window.

AUX SELECT Section
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Assigns Send 1 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders.
While held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 destination
assignment.
DAW SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 6.

AUX 2

Assigns Send 2 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders.
While held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 2 destination
assignment.
DAW SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 7.

AUX 3

Assigns Send 3 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders.
While held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 3 destination
assignment.
DAW SHIFT/ADD As above, for Send 8.

218

AUX 4

Assigns Send 4 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders.
While held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 4 destination
assignment.

AUX 5

Assigns Send 5 Level to Encoders, and Send 5 to 8 Levels to DSP Encoders.
While held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 5 destination
assignment.

Chapter 20 Yamaha DM1000

Control

Assignment

AUX 6

Switches Encoder Push-Switch buttons between normal behavior and
setting default value.

AUX 8

Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons when channel strip AUTO
button is off:
 Indicator off: track selection.
 Indicator on: Insert selection.

ENCODER MODE Section
Control

Assignment

PAN

Assigns Pan to Encoders; assigns selected track’s pan/surround parameters
to DSP Encoders.

AUX

Assigns Send 1 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders.
While held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 destination
assignment.

FADER MODE Section
Control

Assignment

FADER MODE

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

LCD Function
Control

Assignment

Left & Right

Plug-In Edit: shifts parameter display by the number of Parameter controls
in the control surface group (usually four).

DAW ALT/FINE Plug-In Edit: shifts parameter display by one (parameter).

LCD
The LCD displays different data, depending on the page selected with the F2, F3, and
F4 buttons:
 INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT Display Mode: parameter details, plug-in selection or plug-in
parameters. Press [F2] to select this mode.
Display

Assignment

LCD

Displays parameter details, plug-in selection or plug-in parameters.

TIME CODE

Active if counter is displaying time code.

FEET

Not assigned.

BEATS

Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/format/ticks.

Time display

Displays time code or bars/beats/format/ticks.

SELECT ASSIGN

Displays the Encoder assignment as follows:
Pan, Snd1 to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

Chapter 20 Yamaha DM1000

219

LCD Insert Page
Control

Assignment

ASSIGN

—

COMPARE

Switches DSP display between “track name/parameter name” and
“parameter name/parameter value” modes.

BYPASS

Activates/Deactivates bypass of plug-in insert currently being edited.

INSERT/PARAM

Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit modes.

Parameter control 1–4
push-switch

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 push-switch centers Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 push-switch centers Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 push-switch centers Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 push-switch sets Surround Mode to center.
Assignment Send:
 Enables/Disables Sends 1 to 4 or Mutes 5 to 8.
Plug-In Assign:
 Confirm insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 plug-in selection, selects this insert slot and
enters Plug-In Edit mode.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default, or sets bi-polar switch on/off.

Parameter controls

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 controls Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 controls Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 controls Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 controls Surround Mode.
Assignment Send:
 Control Send 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Level.
Plug-In Assign:
 Assigns insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default.

Data Entry Section
Control

Assignment

Parameter Wheel

Default: move SPL by one bar.
Scrub: scrubbing.
Shuttle: Shuttle mode.

– (DEC)

Default: leaves Folder.
Goto Marker: cancels dialog.
DAW ALT/FINE Opens/Closes Audio window.

+ (INC)

220

Enters folder of selected track.

Chapter 20 Yamaha DM1000

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Level Meters

Display momentary and peak level.

Encoder

Adjusts parameter selected in the AUX SELECT section.

Encoder Push-Switch

Pan selected: sets Pan to center if MATRIX 1 on.
Send 1 to 8 selected: edits Send Pre/Post, activates/deactivates Send Mute
or sets Send Level to default value.
Send Assign, Input, or Output: confirms selection.

SEL

If AUTO off:
 AUX [AUX 8] off: selects track.
 AUX [AUX 8] on: selects track for insert assignment.
If AUTO on:
 Cycles through automation modes. With an automation mode button held
down, sets this automation mode.
DAW SHIFT/ADD Sets volume to unity level.

MATRIX SELECT 1

Sets volume to unity level.

SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.
DAW OPTION/ALL Disables Solo for all tracks.

ON

Enables/Disables Mute.
DAW OPTION/ALL Unmutes all tracks.

Fader

Adjusts volume, or duplicates Encoder assignment in Flip mode.

Stereo Channel Strip
Control

Assignment

AUTO

Switches channel strips’ SEL buttons between track and insert selection.

USER DEFINED KEYS Section
These keys can be assigned to the following functions:
Control

Assignment

DAW WIN STATUS

Opens/Closes the Audio window.

DAW REC/RDY 1 to 16

Enables/Disables Record Ready.

DAW WIN TRANSPORT

Opens/Closes the Transport window.

DAW BANK-

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.

DAW BANK+

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.

DAW SHIFT/ADD

Shifts to second meaning of some buttons.

DAW OPTION/ALL

While held down, value change mode is set to “relative”: relative value
changes result in a minimum, default, or maximum value for the edited
parameter. Also see description of other buttons.

Chapter 20 Yamaha DM1000

221

Control

Assignment

DAW GROUP STATUS

Enters Group Edit mode:
 The upper line in the DSP edit section displays the currently edited group
number and name.
 Parameter control push-switch buttons 1 to 4 switch between properties
of the currently edited group. Group name shown in lower line of LCD.
 When INSERT/PARAM is off, DSP Edit Scroll Encoder scrolls through the
group properties. At other times, it selects the group currently being
edited.
 The SELECT buttons enable/disable group membership of the track.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Track View.
DAW SUSPEND

Enables/Disables the Group Clutch.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Extended Track View.
DAW CREATE GROUP

Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode (see above).

DAW SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View.
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT

Switches between the Arrange and Track Mixer windows.

DAW CHANNEL -

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the left.

DAW CHANNEL+

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right.

DAW CTRL/CLUTCH

While held down, the Group Clutch is engaged (all groups are disabled).

DAW ALT/FINE

While held down, value change mode is set to “fine”: relative value changes
work at maximum resolution. Also see description of other buttons.

DAW MONI STATUS

—

DAW UNDO

Performs undo.

DAW SHIFT/ADD Performs redo.
DAW OPTION/ALL Opens undo history window.
DAW SAVE

Saves the song.

DAW WIN MEM-LOC

Opens/Closes the Marker List window.

DAW OPTION/ALL Save As…: saves the song under a different name.
DAW EDIT TOOL

Selects the next tool. While held, numerical buttons select a specific tool.

DAW WIN INSERT

Opens/Closes the Sample Editor window.

DAW REC/RDY ALL

Disable Record Ready on all tracks.

DAW SCRUB

Enables/Disables Scrub mode.

DAW SHUTTLE

Enables/Disables Shuttle mode.

DAW REW

Shuttles backward.

DAW FF

Shuttles forward.

DAW STOP

Stop

DAW PLAY

Play

DAW SHIFT/ADD Pause

222

DAW REC

Record

DAW PRE

Sets left locator.

Chapter 20 Yamaha DM1000

Control

Assignment

DAW IN

Sets Drop In locator.

DAW OUT

Sets Drop Out locator.

DAW POST

Sets right locator.

DAW RTZ

Goes to the left locator.

DAW END

Goes to the right locator.

DAW ONLINE

Activates/Deactivates internal/external Sync.

DAW QUICK PUNCH

Enables/Disables Drop mode.

DAW AUTO FADER

Enables/Disables Volume automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO PAN

Enables/Disables Pan automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO PLUGIN

Enables/Disables Plug-in parameter automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO MUTE

Enables/Disables Mute automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO SEND

Enables/Disables Send Level automation playback and recording.

DAW AUTO SEND
MUTE

—

DAW AUTO WRITE

Sets selected track to “Write” automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Write.”

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to “Write” automation mode.
DAW AUTO TOUCH

Sets selected track to “Touch” automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Touch.”

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to “Touch” automation mode.
DAW AUTO LATCH

Sets selected track to “Latch” automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Latch.”

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to “Latch” automation mode.
DAW AUTO READ

Sets selected track to “Read” automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Read.”

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to “Read” automation mode.
DAW AUTO TRIM

—

DAW AUTO OFF

Sets selected track to “Off” automation mode. While held down, channel
Strip AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Off.”

DAW OPTION/ALL Sets all tracks to “Off” automation mode.
DAW AUTO STATUS

While held down, the Channel Strip displays show the automation mode of
the selected track.

Chapter 20 Yamaha DM1000

223

21

Yamaha DM2000

21

Set Up
Please follow these steps before using your control surface with Logic Pro 7.
 Make sure that your DM2000 unit(s) are connected to the computer via USB.
 Make sure that the MIDI driver shipped with the unit is installed.
On the DM2000 Front Panel:
Basically, you set up the DM2000 as if you are using it with Pro Tools. See the DM2000
user manual, section 19. Here are the necessary steps:
 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP], then [F4] (below the LCD) so that the Setup / MIDI/Host
page is visible. Now move the cursor to the port parameters: select DAW, then select
USB and 1-3.
 Press DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE], then [F1] (below the LCD). Choose General DAW as the
TARGET parameter.
 Press LAYER [REMOTE 1].
In Logic:
When Logic Pro is launched, the unit is installed automatically. You should see three
DM2000 (USB 1-3) icons in the Setup window, aligned horizontally.

225

Assignment Overview
A right-aligned modifier button (such as SHIFT) below a button description indicates
that the button has an alternate meaning/use while holding down this modifier.

MATRIX SELECT Section
Control

Assignment

MATRIX 1

Switches Encoder Push-Switch buttons between normal behavior and setting default
value.

MATRIX 2

Switches the Encoder Push-Switch buttons between Send Position and Send Mute
mode.

MATRIX 4

If ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] is on, switches the channel strip SEL buttons between
Insert Select (indicator off ) and Insert Bypass mode (indicator on).

AUX SELECT Section
Control

Assignment

AUX 1

Assigns Send 1 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 destination assignment.
USER 4 As above, for Send 6.

AUX 2

Assigns Send 2 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 2 destination assignment.
USER 4 As above, for Send 7.

AUX 3

Assigns Send 3 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 3 destination assignment.
USER 4 As above, for Send 8.

226

AUX 4

Assigns Send 4 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 4 destination assignment.

AUX 5

Assigns Send 5 Level to Encoders, and Send 5 to 8 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 5 destination assignment.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

ENCODER MODE Section
Control

Assignment

PAN

Assigns Pan to Encoders; assigns selected track’s pan/surround parameters to DSP
Encoders.

AUX/MTRX

Assigns Send 1 Level to Encoders, and Send 1 to 4 Levels to DSP Encoders. While
held, the Channel Strip displays show the current Send 1 destination assignment.

ASSIGN 1

Assigns Track Input to Encoders. While held down, the Channel Strip displays show
the current Track Input assignment.

ASSIGN 2

Assigns Track Output to Encoders. While held down, the Channel Strip displays show
the current Track Output assignment.

ASSIGN 3

When Encoders display a Send level, switches them to Send Destination assignment
mode. Press Encoder Push-Switch or ASSIGN 3 again to confirm the assignment.

ASSIGN 4

Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons:
 Indicator off: track selection.
 Indicator on: Insert selection or Insert Bypass, depending on MATRIX SELECT
[MATRIX 4].

FADER MODE Section
Control

Assignment

FADER

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

AUX/MTRX

Enables/Disables Flip mode.

DISPLAY ACCESS Section
Control
METER

Assignment
Clears Overload LEDs.
USER 4 Switches to Global View and enables MIDI Tracks.

USER 13 Opens/Closes Arrange window.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

227

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS Section
Control

Assignment

Display

Opens/Closes the Sample Edit window.

5

—

6

Switches DSP display between “track name/parameter name” and “parameter name/
parameter value” modes.

7

Activates/Deactivates bypass of plug-in insert that is currently being edited.

8

Switches between Plug-in Assign and Plug-in Edit modes.

Parameter Up
& Parameter
Down

Plug-In Edit: shifts parameter display by the number of Parameter controls in the
control surface group (usually four).

USER 13 Plug-In Edit: shifts parameter display by one (parameter).

228

Parameter
control 1–4
push-switch

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 push-switch centers Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 push-switch centers Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 push-switch centers Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 push-switch sets Surround Mode to center.
Assignment Send:
 Enables/Disables Sends 1 to 4 or Mutes 5 to 8.
Plug-In Assign:
 Confirm insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 plug-in selection, selects this insert slot and enters
Plug-In Edit mode.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default, or switches bi-polar parameter value on/off.

Parameter
controls

Assignment Pan:
 Parameter control 1 controls Pan or Surround Angle.
 Parameter control 2 controls Surround Diversity.
 Parameter control 3 controls Surround LFE.
 Parameter control 4 controls Surround Mode.
Assignment Send:
 Control Send 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Level.
Plug-In Assign:
 Assigns insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8.
Plug-In Edit mode:
 Sets value to default.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

LCD
Display

Assignment

LCD

Displays parameter details, plug-in selection or plug-in parameters.

TIME CODE

Active if counter is displaying time code.

FEET

Not assigned.

BEATS

Active if counter is displaying bars/beats/format/ticks.

Time display

Displays time code or bars/beats/format/ticks.

SELECT ASSIGN Displays the Encoder assignment as follows:
Pan, Snd1 to Snd8, S1As to S8As, In, Out.

TRACK ARMING Section
Control

Assignment

1 to 24

Enables/Disables Record Ready.
USER 5 Disables Record Ready for all tracks.

MASTER

Disables Record Ready for all tracks.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

229

AUTOMIX Section
Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

While held, the Channel Strip displays show the automation mode of selected track.

REC

Sets selected track to “Write” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Write.”
USER 5 Sets all tracks to “Write” automation mode.

ABORT/UNDO

Sets selected track to “Touch” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Touch.”

USER 5 Sets all tracks to automation mode “Touch.”
AUTOREC

Sets selected track to “Latch” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to “Latch.”

USER 5 Sets all tracks to automation mode “Latch.”
RETURN

Sets selected track to “Read” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip
AUTO buttons set automation mode to” Read.”
USER 5 Sets all tracks to “Read” automation mode.

RELATIVE

—

TOUCH SENSE

Sets selected track to “Off” automation mode. While held down, channel Strip AUTO
buttons set automation mode to “Off.”

USER 5 Sets all tracks to “Off” automation mode.

230

OVERWRITE
[FADER]

Enables/Disables volume automation playback and recording.

OVERWRITE
[PAN]

Enables/Disables pan automation playback and recording.

OVERWRITE
[EQ]

Enables/Disables Plug-in parameter automation playback and recording.

OVERWRITE
[ON]

Enables/Disables mute automation playback and recording.

OVERWRITE
[AUX]

Enables/Disables Send level automation playback and recording.

OVERWRITE
[AUX ON]

—

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

USER DEFINED KEYS Section
Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

Opens/Closes the Audio window.

1

Opens/Closes the Transport window.

2

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left.

3

Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right.

4

Shifts to second meaning of some buttons (see descriptions of other buttons).

5

While held down, value change mode is set to “full”: any relative value changes will
“jump” to their minimum or maximum values.

6

Enters Group Edit mode:
 The upper line in the DSP edit section displays the currently edited group number
and name.
 Parameter control push-switch buttons 1 to 4 switch the properties of the group
currently being edited (names shown in lower line of display).
 When INSERT/PARAM is off, DSP Edit Scroll Encoder scrolls through the group
properties. Otherwise, it selects the currently edited group.
 The SELECT buttons activate/deactivate group membership of the track.
USER 4 Switches to Track View.

7

Activates/Deactivates the Group Clutch (disables all groups).
USER 4 Switches to Extended Track View.

8

Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode (see above).
USER 4 Switches to Global View.

9

Switches between the Arrange and Track Mixer windows.

10

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the left.

11

Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right.

12

While held down, the Group Clutch is engaged (all groups are disabled).

13

While held down, value change mode is set to “fine”: relative value changes work at
maximum resolution. Also see descriptions of other buttons.

14

—

15

Performs Undo.
USER 4 Performs Redo.
USER 5 Opens Undo History window.

16

Saves the song.
USER 5 Save As…: saves the song under a different name.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

231

LOCATOR Section
Control

Assignment

DISPLAY

Opens/Closes the Marker List window.

1 to 8

Recalls markers 1 to 8.
USER 4 Switches to Global View and enables:
1: MIDI Tracks.
2: Inputs.
3: Audio Tracks.
4: Audio Instruments.
5: Aux Tracks.
6: Busses.
7: Outputs and Master object.

DISPLAY Selects tool:
HISTORY 1: Arrow.
[FORWARD] 2: Pencil.
3: Eraser.
4: Text edit.
5: Scissors.
6: Glue.
7: Solo.
8: Mute.

232

AUDITION

—

PRE

Sets left locator.

IN

Sets Drop In locator.

OUT

Sets Drop Out locator.

POST

Sets right locator.

RETURN TO
ZERO

Navigates to the left locator.

END

Navigates to the right locator.

ONLINE

Enables/Disables internal/external sync.

QUICK PUNCH

Enables/Disables Drop mode.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

Channel Strips
Control

Assignment

Level Meters

Displays momentary and peak levels.

Encoder

Adjusts parameter selected in the AUX SELECT section.

Encoder PushSwitch

Pan selected: sets Pan to center if MATRIX 1 on Send 1 to 8 selected: edits Send Pre/
Post, activates/deactivates Send Mute or sets Send Level to default value.
Send Assign, Input, or Output selected: confirms selection.

AUTO

Cycles through automation modes.
With an automation mode button held down, sets this automation mode.

SEL

If ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] off: selects track.
If ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] on:
 BYPASS off: selects track for plug-in selection.
 BYPASS on: switches bypass status of currently selected insert slot.
USER 4 Sets volume to unity level.

MATRIX SELECT Sets volume to unity level.
1
SOLO

Enables/Disables Solo.
USER 5 Disables Solo for all tracks.

ON

Enables/Disables Mute.
USER 5 Unmutes all tracks.

Channel strip
display

Displays track name, or Send, In, or Out assignment.

Fader

Adjusts volume, or duplicates Encoder in Flip mode.

Transport/Cursor Section
Control

Assignment

REW

Shuttles backward.

FF

Shuttles forward.

STOP

Stop

PLAY

Play
USER 4 Pause

REC

Record

DISPLAY
HISTORY
[BACK]

—

DISPLAY
HISTORY
[FORWARD]

Selects the next tool. While held down, numerical buttons select a specific tool.

SCRUB

Enables/Disables Scrub mode.

SHUTTLE

Enables/Disables Shuttle mode.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

233

Control

Assignment

Parameter
Wheel

Default: move SPL by one bar.
Scrub: scrubbing.
Shuttle: Shuttle mode.

DEC

Default: leaves Folder.
Goto Marker: cancels dialog.
USER 13 Opens/Closes Audio window.

INC

Switches between Cursor and Zoom mode.

Cursor Up

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard up arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.

USER 4 Zoom mode: Individual track zoom in.
USER 13 Page Up.
USER 5 Scroll to top.
+ USER 13
Cursor Down

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard down arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out vertically.

USER 4 Zoom mode: Individual track zoom out.
USER 13 Page Down.
USER 5 Scroll to bottom.
+ USER 13
Cursor Left

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard left arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms out horizontally.

USER 4 Zoom mode: Individual track zoom reset for tracks of the same type.
USER 13 Page Left.
USER 5 Scroll to left border.
+ USER 13
Cursor Right

Cursor mode: equivalent to computer keyboard right arrow key.
Zoom mode: zooms in horizontally.

USER 4 Zoom mode: Individual track zoom reset of all tracks.
USER 13 Page Right.
USER 5 Scroll to right border.
+ USER 13
ENTER

234

Enters folder of selected track.

Chapter 21 Yamaha DM2000

Logic Control—Specifications

A

Appendix

A

Logic Control (Base Unit)
This appendix describes the specifications of the Logic Control unit.

Display
 55 × 2-digit (LCD) backlit multi-function display for detailed parameter information
and metering
 Built-in screensaver function
 2-digit, 7-segment display for mode displays
 10-digit, 7-segment display for song position information in either SMPTE or bar/
beats/ticks
 1 × button to toggle the LCD between parameter name/value and to activate the
level meters.
 1 × button to toggle the 7-segment display between SMPTE and bar/beats/ticks.
 2 × LEDs show the current 7-segment display status.
 1 × LED shows the current Solo status.

Per Channel (8 Channels)
 1 × motorized 100mm touch-sensitive Penny & Giles faders with 10Bit resolution
(1024 steps)
 1 × V-POT: digital endless rotary knob with position indicator and integrated push
button for parameter adjustments of pan, EQ, send levels, and so on
 4 × buttons with integrated colored LED for channel functions such as: Record, Solo,
Mute, and Channel Selection
 Signal Present LED indicates when an audio or MIDI signal is present.

Master Fader
 1 × motorized 100mm touch-sensitive Penny & Giles fader with 10Bit resolution (1024
steps).

235

Controller
 6 × buttons with status LED for direct selection of parameter groups for Track, Pan/
Surround, EQ, Send, Plug-In, Instrument
 8 × buttons to directly select sections of Logic mixers such as audio tracks, MIDI
tracks, inputs, busses, and so on
 4 × buttons to shift the displayed mixer channels to the left and right, either one
channel at a time, or in banks
 1 × button with status LED for the channel fader/V-POT flip: swaps the assignments
of fader and V-POTs
 1 × button with status LED to toggle between Mixer View and Global View
 4 × buttons with status LED to activate automation modes such as Read, Write,
Touch, and Latch
 4 × buttons to select utility functions such as: “Save Song,” “Undo,” “Cancel,” or
confirmations in dialogs
 4 × buttons to access additional functions through modifier keys
 8 × freely definable user keys
 2 × currently unassigned buttons for future use

Transport Controls
5 × Transport buttons with status LED for Forward, Rewind, Stop, Play, Record
1 × Jog/Scrub wheel for precise location of any song position and audio scrubbing
1 × Scrub button with status LED to activate the scrub function
1 × Marker and 1 × Nudge button with status LED to extend the functionality of the
Forward/Rewind buttons (Nudge functionality only available in Logic Pro)
 4 × Navigation buttons to quickly navigate through plug-in slots and parameter
pages
 1 × Zoom button to switch the navigate buttons to zoom

Â
Â
Â
Â

Internal Processor
 High-speed RISC micro controller
 Firmware can be updated via MIDI dump.

Connections
Â
Â
Â
Â

236

1 × MIDI in, 1 × MIDI out.
2 × assignable foot switch inputs to control Start/Stop and Punch In/Out, for example
1 × assignable external control signal input to connect a volume pedal.
Power supply jack

Appendix A Logic Control—Specifications

Power Supply
 International (100–250V) external power supply for standard power cords
 Rear-mounted power switch

Weight and Construction
 Logic Control weighs 5.05 kg (unpacked).
 High quality, sturdy 1mm steel chassis and case
 Comfortable, durable wrist rest

Dimensions

Logic Control XT (Extension Unit)
Display
 55 × 2-digit (LCD) backlit multi-function display for detailed parameter information
and metering
 Built-in screensaver function

Per channel (8 channels)
 1 × motorized 100mm touch-sensitive Penny & Giles faders with 10Bit resolution
(1024 steps)
 1 × V-POT: digital endless rotary knob with position indicator and integrated push
button for parameter adjustments of pan, EQ, send levels, and so on
 4 × buttons with integrated colored LED for channel functions such as: Record, Solo,
Mute, and Channel Selection
 Signal Present LED indicates the presence of an audio signal

Internal Processor
 High-speed RISC micro controller
 Firmware can be updated via MIDI dump.

Appendix A Logic Control—Specifications

237

Connections
 1 × MIDI in, 1 × MIDI out
 Power supply jack

Power Supply
 International (100–250V) external power supply for standard power cords
 Rear-mounted power switch

Weight and Construction
 Logic Control XT weighs 3.45 kg (unpacked)
 High quality, sturdy 1mm steel chassis and case
 Comfortable, durable wrist rest

Dimensions

238

Appendix A Logic Control—Specifications

Logic Control—
MIDI Implementation

B

Appendix

B

The following information is important for software vendors who wish to create a level
of software integration for the Logic/Mackie Control/XT units.
This documentation covers firmware version V1.0.
Note: All numbers are in hexadecimal format.
Variable bytes are shown in italics and use characters other than a-f as a placeholder.
All channel messages use running status messages. Once an initial 3-byte message has
been sent, the status byte is dropped from proceeding transmitted channel messages,
in order to conserve bandwidth.

SysEx Message Header
The following documentation uses the place holder “” whenever the SysEx
header is transmitted or received. It has the following form:
F0
MIDI SysEx status byte
00 00 66
Mackie 3-byte SysEx manufacturer ID
ii
Model ID
10
Logic Control
11
Logic Control XT
A device ID is not required, as each unit needs a dedicated MIDI cable.

239

Global Control Messages
Host Connection and Initialization
Received:
 00 F7
Device Query
 02 ss ss ss ss ss ss ss rr rr rr rr F7
Host Connection Reply
 0F 7F F7
Go Offline
Transmitted:
 01 ss ss ss ss ss ss ss ll ll ll ll F7
Host Connection Query
 03 ss ss ss ss ss ss ss F7
Host Connection Confirmation
 04 ss ss ss ss ss ss ss F7
Host Connection Error
ss
=
Serial number (7 bytes ASCII text, non null-terminated)
ll
=
Challenge code (4 bytes)
rr
=
Response code (4 bytes)
Offline Mode:
Logic Control employs a query system to maintain a connection to the host software.
When Logic Control is initially powered up, it defaults to Offline mode. In Offline mode,
Logic Control’s faders move to their lowest setting, and the LCD reads “EMAGIC LOGIC
CONTROL -- by MACKIE.” After power-on, Logic Control also transmits a system
exclusive Host Connection Query message that is used (by the host) to detect a
connection, and what type of device is connected (Logic Control/Logic Control XT).
Communications Initialization:
When the host software receives a Host Connection Query message (containing a serial
number and a random challenge code), it should transmit a Host Connection Reply
command within 300ms to initialize Logic Control. The command must contain the
same serial number and the correct response code for the challenge code. Here is the
algorithm (l1 to l4 = challenge code bytes 1 to 4, r1 to r4 = response code bytes 1 to 4):
r1 = 0x7F & (l1 + (l2 ^ 0xa) – l4);
r2 = 0x7F & ((l3>>4) ^ (l1+l4));
r3 = 0x7F & (l4-(l3<<2) ^ (l1|l2));
r4 = 0x7F & (l2-l3+(0xF0^(l4<<4)));
Logic Control will, in turn, respond with either:
 a Host Connection Confirmation message that contains the serial number, and switch
to Online mode—where it will await further instructions from the host, or
 reply with a Host Connection Error message, if the response code was wrong.

240

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

Online Mode:
Once the connection between Logic Control and the host software has been made,
Logic Control stays in Online Mode until it receives a Go Offline message.

Firmware version request
Received:
 13 00 F7
Version request
Transmitted:
 14 vv vv vv vv vv F7 Version reply
vv
5 ASCII bytes containing version string, e. g. “V1.0”.
Note: When Logic Control receives a version request message, it sends the version
reply message.

Reset Messages
Received:
 61 F7 Faders to minimum
(Sends all faders to the bottom of their throw)
 62 F7 All LEDs off
(Turns off all LEDs on Logic Control)
 63 F7 Reset
(Re-Boots Logic Control into Offline mode)
Transmitted:
No

Configuration Messages
Received:
 0A tt F7
Transport button click
 0B ll F7
LCD back light saver
 0C mm F7
Touchless movable faders
 0E ii ss F7
Fader touch sensitivity
Transmitted:
No
tt
00 = no transport button click
01 = transport button click (default)
ll
00 = LCD back light off
01 to 7F = LCD back light on, with time out in minutes (default: 0F = 15
minutes)
mm 00 = fader movements are only transmitted if the fader has been recognized
as touched
01 = fader movements are also transmitted if the fader has not been recognized as touched (e. g. with fingernail or pen)
ii
Fader ID (00 thru 07; Master = 08)
ss
Fader touch sensitivity (00 to 05; default: 03)

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

241

Common Control Messages
Faders
Received:
Ei, ll, hh Move fader to position
Transmitted:
Ei, ll, hh Fader moved by user
i
Fader ID (00 thru 07; Master = 08)
ll
Fader position value low 7 bits (00–7F)
hh
Fader position value high 7 bits (00–7F)
Example:
E0, 40, 55 = Fader Ch. 1, position (55 << 7) + 40
Note: Message format for transmitted fader position is the same as for received
position. Only the top (high) 10 of the 14 transmitted bits are required. Positions 0 to
1023 (decimal) are transmitted as 0000 to 03FF (Ei 00 00 to Ei 7F 7F).

Switches
Received:
None
Transmitted:
90, ii, ss Switch pressed/released by user
ii
Switch ID (See “Logic Control—Control Surface Layout and IDs” on page 251.)
ss
Switch State
00 = switch or fader relead
7F = switch pressed or fader touched
Example:
90, 0F, 7F = SOLO Ch. 8 is pressed
90, 0F, 00 = SOLO Ch. 8 is released
Note: LEDs and switches use the same control message. This approach means that an
LED has the same ID as its corresponding switch.

LEDs
Received:
90, ii, ss Set LED status
Transmitted:
None
ii
LED ID (See “Logic Control—Control Surface Layout and IDs” on page 251.)
ss
LED State (7F = on, 00 = off, 01 = flashing)
Example:
90, 08, 7F = Turn LED 08 on
90, 08, 00 = Turn LED 08 off
Note: Switches and LEDs use the same control message. This ensures that an LED
always shares an ID with its corresponding switch.

242

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

V-Pots
Received:
None
Transmitted:
B0, 1i, XX V-POTs turned by user
i
V-POT ID (00–07)
XX

delta value in the form of (0 s v v v v v v)
s
direction bit:
0 = clockwise,
1 = counter clockwise
vv
number of ticks

Examples:
 B0, 10, 01 = V-POT Ch. 1 is being turned clockwise by one tick.
 B0, 17, 47 = V-POT Ch. 8 is being turned counter-clockwise by 7 ticks.

V-Pot LED ring
Received:
B0, 3i, XX Set LED ring display
Transmitted:
None
i
V-POT number (0 thru 7)
XX
V-POT display control byte in the form of
(0 p x x v v v v):
p
V-POT display center LED state
(1 = on, 0 = off )
xx
V-POT mode (00 thru 03; see diagrams below)
vv
V-POT display position value
00 = all LEDs in ring off;
01 thru 0B see diagrams below
Example:
 B0, 31, 06 = V-POT 2 display shows LEDs at position 6.
Note: In any V-POT display mode, a received LED position value of 00 will turn off all of
the V-POT LEDs.

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

243

V-POT Display modes available:

244

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

External Controller
Received:
None
Transmitted:
B0, 2E, vv External Controller changed
vv
External Controller position value (00–7F)
Example:
 B0, 2E, 07 = External Controller value = 07

Jog Wheel
Received:
None
Transmitted:
B0, 3C, XX Jog wheel turned by user
XX
delta value in the form of (0 s v v v v v v)
s
direction bit: 0 = clockwise, 1 = counter clockwise
vv
number of ticks
Examples:
 B0, 3C, 01 = Jog forward.
 B0, 3C, 41 = Jog reverse.

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

245

LCD
Received:
, 12, oo, yy, …, F7 Update LCD
Transmitted:
None
oo
Display offset to write from:
00 thru 37 for upper line,
38 thru 6F for lower line.
yy
Data: ASCII equivalents for display characters—written from left to right—
and including line wrapping between upper and lower lines. Up to 100 data
bytes may be sent in one message.
Example:
 The following message writes “Hello” to the top left of the LCD on a Logic Control
master section.
F0 00 00 66 10 12 00 48 65 6C 6C 6F F7
Notes:
 There are 7 displayed characters per channel, with the exception of channel 8, which
is limited to displaying the first 6 characters. Internally however, the LCD stores 2 x 56
characters.
 In most cases, you will use the LCD in a scribble-strip fashion (text above each
channel). In this scenario, you should only use the first six characters per channel,
thus allowing for spaces between the text of each channel.
 The lower line can be switched into meter mode. See “Metering” on page 249 for
further details.
 While the LCD switches between horizontal and vertical metering modes, it ignores
LCD messages. You should delay LCD messages for at least 600 ms after sending an
LCD metering mode change message.

246

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

Time Code/BBT Display
Received:
, 10, yy, …, F7 Update multiple characters
B0, 4i, yy
Update single character
Transmitted:
None
i
Digit ID: 0 = right-most, 9 = left-most
yy
Data bytes representing character to be written (See “7-Segment Display
Character Table” on page 248). Up to ten characters can be sent in the SysEx
message.
Examples:
 The following message writes “109.02.01.126” to the Time Code display (note decimal
points).
F0 00 00 66 10 10 36 32 31 71 30 72 30 79 30 31 F7
 B0 40 30 41 31 = writes “10” into the last two digits.
Important: The digits in the Time Code and Assignment displays are written RIGHT-TOLEFT, which helps to conserve bandwidth.

Assignment 7-segment display
Received:
, 11, yy, yy, F7 Update multiple characters
B0, 4i, yy
Update single character
Transmitted:
None
i
Digit ID: A= right, B = left
yy
Data bytes representing character to be written (See “7-Segment Display
Character Table” on page 248). Two characters can be sent in the SysEx
message.
Example:
 B0 4B 10 4A 4E = writes “Pn.” to the Assignment display.
Important: The digits in the Time Code and Assignment displays are written RIGHT-TOLEFT, to help conserve bandwidth.

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

247

7-Segment Display Character Table

Hint:
 Characters @ (40h) thru ` (60h) = (ASCII value) − 40h
 Characters ! (21h) thru ? (3Fh) = ASCII value
Note: The decimal point on each 7-segment character can be lit by adding 40 Hex to
the value of the data.

248

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

Metering
Received:
D0, XX
Peak level
, 20, ii, mm, F7
Channel meter mode
, 21, yy, F7
Global LCD meter mode
Transmitted:
None
XX
Meter level in the form of (0 h h h l l l l):
hh
Channel to be addressed (0 thru 7)
ll
Meter level:
0 thru C = level meter 0% to 100%
Overload not cleared!
E = set overload
F = clear overload
ii
Channel ID (0 to 7)
mm mode bit map in the form of (0 0 0 0 0 l p s):
l
Enable level meter on LCD
p
Enable peak hold display (horizontal only)
s
Enable Signal LED
yy
00 = horizontal; 01 = vertical
Notes:
 There is only one level meter per channel. For stereo tracks, use the maximum of left
and right levels.
 Only transmit peak levels. Logic Control automatically decreases the level meter bars,
and switches off the Signal Present LED (over time). This approach ensures that MIDI
bandwidth takes only a fraction of that required by implementations where the
current level (and peak level) is transmitted constantly.
 Decay rate is approximately 300ms per meter division (1.8 seconds to fall from 100%
to 0%).
 The LCD meter value and the duration of the Signal Present LED are controlled by the
same data byte.
 While the LCD switches between horizontal and vertical metering mode, it ignores
LCD messages. You should delay LCD messages for at least 600 ms after sending an
LCD metering mode change message.

Appendix B Logic Control—MIDI Implementation

249

Logic Control—
Control Surface Layout and IDs

ID

Switch

LED

Function

00

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 1

01

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 2

02

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 3

03

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 4

04

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 5

05

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 6

06

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 7

07

•

•

REC/RDY Ch. 8

08

•

•

SOLO Ch. 1

09

•

•

SOLO Ch. 2

0A

•

•

SOLO Ch. 3

0B

•

•

SOLO Ch. 4

0C

•

•

SOLO Ch. 5

0D

•

•

SOLO Ch. 6

0E

•

•

SOLO Ch. 7

0F

•

•

SOLO Ch. 8

10

•

•

MUTE Ch. 1

11

•

•

MUTE Ch. 2

12

•

•

MUTE Ch. 3

13

•

•

MUTE Ch. 4

14

•

•

MUTE Ch. 5

15

•

•

MUTE Ch. 6

16

•

•

MUTE Ch. 7

17

•

•

MUTE Ch. 8

18

•

•

SELECT Ch. 1

19

•

•

SELECT Ch. 2

C

Appendix

C

251

252

ID

Switch

LED

Function

1A

•

•

SELECT Ch. 3

1B

•

•

SELECT Ch. 4

1C

•

•

SELECT Ch. 5

1D

•

•

SELECT Ch. 6

1E

•

•

SELECT Ch. 7

1F

•

•

SELECT Ch. 8

20

•

V-Select Ch. 1

21

•

V-Select Ch. 2

22

•

V-Select Ch. 3

23

•

V-Select Ch. 4

24

•

V-Select Ch. 5

25

•

V-Select Ch. 6

26

•

V-Select Ch. 7

27

•

V-Select Ch. 8

28

•

•

ASSIGNMENT: TRACK

29

•

•

ASSIGNMENT: SEND

2A

•

•

ASSIGNMENT: PAN/SURROUND

2B

•

•

ASSIGNMENT: PLUG-IN

2C

•

•

ASSIGNMENT: EQ

2D

•

•

ASSIGNMENT: INSTRUMENT

2E

•

FADER BANKS: BANK Left

2F

•

FADER BANKS: BANK Right

30

•

FADER BANKS: CHANNEL Left

31

•

32

•

•

FLIP

33

•

•

GLOBAL VIEW

34

•

NAME/VALUE

FADER BANKS: CHANNEL Right

35

•

SMPTE/BEATS

36

•

F1

37

•

F2

38

•

F3

39

•

F4

3A

•

F5

3B

•

F6

3C

•

F7

3D

•

F8

Appendix C Logic Control—Control Surface Layout and IDs

ID

Switch

3E

•

LED

Function
GLOBAL VIEW: MIDI TRACKS

3F

•

GLOBAL VIEW: INPUTS

40

•

GLOBAL VIEW: AUDIO TRACKS

41

•

GLOBAL VIEW: AUDIO INSTRUMENT

42

•

GLOBAL VIEW: AUX

43

•

GLOBAL VIEW: BUSSES

44

•

GLOBAL VIEW: OUTPUTS

45

•

GLOBAL VIEW: USER

46

•

SHIFT

47

•

OPTION

48

•

CONTROL

49

•

4A

•

•

AUTOMATION: READ/OFF

4B

•

•

AUTOMATION: WRITE

4C

•

•

AUTOMATION: TRIM

4D

•

•

AUTOMATION: TOUCH

4E

•

•

AUTOMATION: LATCH

4F

•

•

GROUP

50

•

•

UTILITIES: SAVE

•

CMD/ALT

51

•

52

•

UTILITIES: CANCEL

53

•

UTILITIES: ENTER

54

•

•

UTILITIES: UNDO

MARKER

55

•

•

NUDGE (Logic Pro only)

56

•

•

CYCLE

57

•

•

DROP

58

•

•

REPLACE

59

•

•

CLICK

5A

•

•

SOLO

5B

•

•

REWIND

5C

•

•

FAST FWD

5D

•

•

STOP

5E

•

•

PLAY

5F

•

•

RECORD

60

•

Cursor Up

61

•

Cursor Down

Appendix C Logic Control—Control Surface Layout and IDs

253

254

ID

Switch

62

•

LED

Cursor Left

Function

63

•

Cursor Right

64

•

•

Zoom

65

•

•

Scrub

66

•

User Switch A

67

•

User Switch B

68

•

Fader Touch Ch. 1

69

•

Fader Touch Ch. 2

6A

•

Fader Touch Ch. 3

6B

•

Fader Touch Ch. 4

6C

•

Fader Touch Ch. 5

6D

•

Fader Touch Ch. 6

6E

•

Fader Touch Ch. 7

6F

•

Fader Touch Ch. 8

70

•

Fader Touch Master

71

•

SMPTE LED

72

•

BEATS LED

73

•

RUDE SOLO LIGHT

76

•

Relay click

Appendix C Logic Control—Control Surface Layout and IDs

Logic Control—
MIDI Implementation Chart

D

Function

Transmitted

Recognized

Remarks

Channel, Default:
Changed:

1
1

1
1

Each Logic Control unit should be installed on a
separate MIDI port.

Mode, Default:
Messages:
Altered:

X
X
X

X
X
X

Note Number
True Voice:

O 0–127
X

O 0–127
X

Velocity, Note On:
Note Off:

O v = 1–127
X v = 00

O v = 1–127
X v = 00

After Touch, Keys:
Chan’s:

X
X

X
O

Pitch Bend

O

O

Control Change

O

O

Program Change
True #:

X

X

SYSTEM
EXCLUSIVE:

O

O

SYSTEM
COMMON:

X

X

Appendix

D

Used for motor faders

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY, Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO, O: Yes
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY, Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO, X: No

255



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 255
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:3ba21e6b-d540-11da-a70d-000a95a9476e
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 f.r Macintosh
Create Date                     : 2006:04:25 23:09:28Z
Modify Date                     : 2006:04:26 09:18:00-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:04:26 09:18:00-07:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Document ID                     : uuid:b201f744-d4af-11da-8ecd-000a95a9476e
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Apple Computer, Inc.
Description                     : 1.0
Title                           : Logic Pro 7.2.1 Dedicated Control Surface Support
Author                          : Apple Computer, Inc.
Keywords                        : kmanual, klogic
Subject                         : 1.0
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu